annotate etc/NEWS @ 26264:cae8531d2565

etags: - --globals is used not only for C-like languages - new option --ignore-case-regex - understands "operator" in C++ - support DOS file names by handling e.g. foo.cgz as if it were foo.c.gz. - new option --declarations - Ada and Python languages added - my and local variables recognised in Perl - "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar Lisp constructs - interface in Java
author Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
date Mon, 01 Nov 1999 11:07:32 +0000
parents 40e6e1faac3a
children b47b74998eef
Ignore whitespace changes - Everywhere: Within whitespace: At end of lines:
rev   line source
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1 GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 23 Jan 1999
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2 Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3 See the end for copying conditions.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5 Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6 For older news, see the file ONEWS.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
8
25995
0c93f1c6603a Note --with-pop change.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 25992
diff changeset
9 * Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1
0c93f1c6603a Note --with-pop change.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 25992
diff changeset
10
0c93f1c6603a Note --with-pop change.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 25992
diff changeset
11 ** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using
0c93f1c6603a Note --with-pop change.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 25992
diff changeset
12 the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary.
0c93f1c6603a Note --with-pop change.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 25992
diff changeset
13
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
14 * Changes in Emacs 21.1
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
15
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
16 ** Faces and frame parameters.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
17
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
18 There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
19 Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
20 `scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
21 `scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
22 sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
23 for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
24 parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
25
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
26 Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
27 `default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
28 `foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
29 `default' face and vice versa.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
30
25951
b3f0ced6423b Add entry for face `menu'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25949
diff changeset
31 ** New face `menu'.
b3f0ced6423b Add entry for face `menu'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25949
diff changeset
32
b3f0ced6423b Add entry for face `menu'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25949
diff changeset
33 The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus.
b3f0ced6423b Add entry for face `menu'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25949
diff changeset
34 Setting the font of LessTif/Motif menus is currently not supported;
b3f0ced6423b Add entry for face `menu'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25949
diff changeset
35 attempts to set the font are ignored in this case.
b3f0ced6423b Add entry for face `menu'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25949
diff changeset
36
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
37 ** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
38
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
39 The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
40 colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
41 correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
42 the screen gamma of a frame's display.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
43
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
44 PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
45 in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
46 color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
47
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
48 The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
49 `ScreenGamma'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
50
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
51 ** Emacs has a new redisplay engine.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
52
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
53 The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
54 Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
55 oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
56 of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
57 the text.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
58
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
59 ** Emacs has a new face implementation.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
60
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
61 The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
62 font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
63 height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
64 These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
65 specify a font.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
66
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
67 Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
68 These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
69 under Lisp changes, below.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
70
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
71 ** New default font is Courier 12pt.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
72
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
73 ** When using a windowing terminal, Emacs window now has a cursor of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
74 its own. When the window is selected, the cursor is solid; otherwise,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
75 it is hollow.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
76
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
77 ** Bitmap areas to the left and right of windows are used to display
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
78 truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
79 foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
80 customizing face `fringe'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
81
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
82 ** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default. You
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
83 can change its appearance by modifying the face `modeline'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
84
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
85 ** LessTif support.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
86
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
87 Emacs now runs with LessTif (see <http://www.lesstif.org>). You will
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
88 need a version 0.88.1 or later.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
89
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
90 ** Toolkit scroll bars.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
91
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
92 Emacs now uses toolkit scrollbars if available. When configured for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
93 LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scrollbar. Otherwise, when
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
94 configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
95 bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
96 bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
97 Emacs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
98
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
99 When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
100 Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
101 Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
102 Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
103 define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
104 `s/freebsd.h' as an example.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
105
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
106 Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
107 a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
108 directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
109 different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
110 system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO',
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
111 add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
112
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
113 The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
114 `float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
115 This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
116 image configuration file contains the necessary information. Since
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
117 Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
118
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
119 ** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
120
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
121 When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
122 widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
123 Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
124
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
125 ** Highlighting of trailing whitespace.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
126
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
127 When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
128 whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
129 defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
130 highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
131 displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
132 whitespace.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
133
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
134 ** Busy-cursor.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
135
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
136 Emacs can optionally display a busy-cursor under X. You can turn the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
137 display on or off by customizing group `cursor'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
138
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
139 ** Blinking cursor
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
140
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
141 M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
142 terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
143 and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
144 the group `cursor'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
145
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
146 ** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
147
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
148 This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
149 generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
150 See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
151 details.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
152
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
153 Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
154 have to do anything to activate it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
155
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
156 ** Tabs and variable-width text.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
157
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
158 Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
159 defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
160 independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
161 Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
162
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
163 ** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
164
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
165 *** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin".
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
166
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
167 emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
168
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
169 The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the Motif
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
170 one.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
171
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
172 *** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, like in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
173 Motif.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
174
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
175 ** Hscrolling in C code.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
176
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
177 Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
178
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
179 ** Tool bar support.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
180
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
181 Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
182 how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
183
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
184 ** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
185
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
186 Different parts of the mode line under X have been made
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
187 mouse-sensitive. Moving the mouse to a mouse-sensitive part in the mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
188 line changes the appearance of the mouse pointer to an arrow, and help
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
189 about available mouse actions is displayed either in the echo area, or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
190 in the tooltip window if you have enabled one.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
191
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
192 Currently, the following actions have been defined:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
193
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
194 - Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line switches between two
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
195 buffers.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
196
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
197 - Mouse-2 on the buffer-name switches to the next buffer, and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
198 M-mouse-2 switches to the previous buffer in the buffer list.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
199
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
200 - Mouse-3 on the buffer-name displays a buffer menu.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
201
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
202 - Mouse-1 on the read-only status in the mode line (`%' or `*')
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
203 toggles the read-only status.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
204
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
205 - Mouse-3 on the mode name display a minor-mode menu.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
206
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
207 ** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
208
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
209 When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
210 from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialogs' is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
211 non-nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
212
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
213 ** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
214
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
215 Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
216 Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
217 the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
218 italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
219 Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
220 attributes like overlines, strike-throught, box are ignored.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
221
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
222 ** Sound support
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
223
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
224 Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
225 (Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
226 Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
227 (*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
228 to enable sound support.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
229
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
230 ** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
231 the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
232 forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
233 value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
234 users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
235 even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
236
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
237 The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
238
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
239 ** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
240
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
241 As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
242 drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
243 `x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
244
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
245 ** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
246 bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
247
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
248 This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
249 `indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
250 variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
251
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
252 ** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
253
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
254 When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
255 value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggessively' is a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
256 number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
257 fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
258
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
259 When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
260 value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggessively' is a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
261 number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
262 fraction of the window's height from the top of the window.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
263
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
264 ** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
265 notably at the end of lines.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
266
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
267 All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
268 spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
269
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
270 ** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
271 query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
272 after each match to get the replacement text.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
273
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
274 ** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
275
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
276 If a message is longer than one line, or mini-buffer contents are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
277 longer than one line, Emacs now resizes the mini-window unless it is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
278 on a frame of its own. You can control the maximum mini-window size
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
279 by setting the following variable:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
280
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
281 - User option: max-mini-window-height
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
282
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
283 Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
284 fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
285 specifies a number of lines. If nil, don't resize.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
286
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
287 Default is 0.25.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
288
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
289 ** Changes to RefTeX mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
290
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
291 *** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
292 created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
293 Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
294 macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
295 sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
296 can be edited from that buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
297
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
298 *** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
299 items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
300 `A' to use all marked entries).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
301
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
302 *** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
303 memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
304
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
305 *** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
306 in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
307 to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
308 been cited.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
309
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
310 ** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
311 has the following new features:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
312
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
313 *** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
314 may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
315 to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
316 time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
317
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
318 *** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
319 feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
320 file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
321 compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
322 pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
323 defaults to 1.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
324
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
325 ** Tooltips.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
326
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
327 Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
328 mouse position. To use them, use the Lisp package `tooltip' which you
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
329 can access via the user option `tooltip-mode'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
330
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
331 Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
332 variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
333 the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
334 tooltip display in the group `tooltip'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
335
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
336 ** Customize changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
337
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
338 *** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the
26096
466a2fb0133c Note about custom comments.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26062
diff changeset
339 `State' menu to add comments. Note that customization comments will
466a2fb0133c Note about custom comments.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26062
diff changeset
340 cause the customizations to fail in earlier versions of Emacs.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
341
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
342 *** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
343 Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
344 default).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
345
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
346 ** New features in evaluation commands
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
347
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
348 The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
349 modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
350 print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
351 customizable variables eval-expression-print-level,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
352 eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
353
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
354 ** Dired changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
355
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
356 *** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
357 command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
358 is, delete only empty directories.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
359
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
360 *** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
361 command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
362 copy directories recursively.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
363
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
364 ** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
365 use the -f option when sending mail.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
366
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
367 ** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
368 selection into the search string rather than giving an error.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
369
25929
a955ea8f6b15 ange-ftp item.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 25910
diff changeset
370 ** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file
a955ea8f6b15 ange-ftp item.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 25910
diff changeset
371 names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash
a955ea8f6b15 ange-ftp item.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 25910
diff changeset
372 sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.)
a955ea8f6b15 ange-ftp item.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 25910
diff changeset
373
25984
eea178de35f5 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25951
diff changeset
374 ** Shell script mode changes.
eea178de35f5 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25951
diff changeset
375
eea178de35f5 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25951
diff changeset
376 Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells
eea178de35f5 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25951
diff changeset
377 derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizeable, and
eea178de35f5 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25951
diff changeset
378 sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style.
eea178de35f5 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25951
diff changeset
379
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
380 ** Etags changes.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
381
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
382 *** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
383
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
384 *** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
385 declarations when given the --declarations option.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
386
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
387 *** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
388 "operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
389
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
390 *** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
391 types.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
392
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
393 *** In Fortran, procedure is no more tagged.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
394
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
395 *** In Java, tags are created for "interface".
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
396
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
397 *** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
398 are now tagged.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
399
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
400 *** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
401 variables are tagged.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
402
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
403 *** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
404
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
405 *** .ss files are Scheme files.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
406
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
407 *** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
408
26140
068f7ad41d40 Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents: 26133
diff changeset
409 ** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment
068f7ad41d40 Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents: 26133
diff changeset
410 and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the
068f7ad41d40 Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents: 26133
diff changeset
411 LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup.
068f7ad41d40 Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents: 26133
diff changeset
412
26016
e60cddba180c latin-[89]
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 25995
diff changeset
413 ** New language environments `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'.
e60cddba180c latin-[89]
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 25995
diff changeset
414 These correspond respectively to the ISO character sets 8859-14
e60cddba180c latin-[89]
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 25995
diff changeset
415 (Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign). There is
e60cddba180c latin-[89]
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 25995
diff changeset
416 currently no specific input method support for them.
e60cddba180c latin-[89]
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 25995
diff changeset
417
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
418 ** New modes and packages
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
419
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
420 *** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
421
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
422 *** hl-line.el provides a minor mode to highlight the current line.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
423
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
424 *** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
425
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
426 *** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
427 Pascal) language.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
428
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
429 *** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
430 the text at point.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
431
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
432 *** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
433
25862
62b8ede0e424 Mention fortune.el.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 25853
diff changeset
434 *** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures.
62b8ede0e424 Mention fortune.el.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 25853
diff changeset
435
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
436 *** whitespace.el ???
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
437
25992
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
438 *** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
439 files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
440 (very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
441 interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
442 often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out /
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
443 uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
444 codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu.
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
445
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
446 *** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle.
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
447
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
448 Here is an example of columns:
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
449
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
450 horse apple bus
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
451 dog pineapple car EXTRA
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
452 porcupine strawberry airplane
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
453
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
454 Doing the following settings:
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
455
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
456 (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ")
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
457 (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]")
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
458 (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ")
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
459 (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t")
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
460
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
461
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
462 Selecting the lines above and typing:
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
463
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
464 M-x delimit-columns-region
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
465
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
466 It results:
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
467
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
468 [ horse , apple , bus , ]
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
469 [ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ]
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
470 [ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ]
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
471
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
472 delim-col has the following options:
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
473
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
474 delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
475 before all columns.
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
476
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
477 delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
478 between each column.
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
479
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
480 delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
481 after all columns.
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
482
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
483 delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
484 each column.
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
485
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
486 delim-col has the following commands:
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
487
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
488 delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region.
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
489 delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle.
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
490
26030
c5e8559a53cb Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26016
diff changeset
491 *** The package recentf.el maintains a menu for visiting files that
c5e8559a53cb Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26016
diff changeset
492 were operated on recently. When enabled, a new "Open Recent" submenu
c5e8559a53cb Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26016
diff changeset
493 is displayed in the "Files" menu.
c5e8559a53cb Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26016
diff changeset
494
c5e8559a53cb Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26016
diff changeset
495 The recent files list is automatically saved across Emacs sessions.
c5e8559a53cb Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26016
diff changeset
496
c5e8559a53cb Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26016
diff changeset
497 To enable/disable recentf use M-x recentf-mode.
c5e8559a53cb Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26016
diff changeset
498
c5e8559a53cb Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26016
diff changeset
499 To enable recentf at Emacs startup use
c5e8559a53cb Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26016
diff changeset
500 M-x customize-variable RET recentf-mode RET.
c5e8559a53cb Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26016
diff changeset
501
c5e8559a53cb Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26016
diff changeset
502 To change the number of recent files displayed and others options use
c5e8559a53cb Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26016
diff changeset
503 M-x customize-group RET recentf RET.
c5e8559a53cb Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26016
diff changeset
504
26149
0a342d5afcc2 elide-head.el
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26144
diff changeset
505 *** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header
0a342d5afcc2 elide-head.el
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26144
diff changeset
506 text.
0a342d5afcc2 elide-head.el
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26144
diff changeset
507
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
508 ** Withdrawn packages
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
509
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
510 *** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
511 functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions.
26133
5eb182b0c724 eval-reg removed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26107
diff changeset
512
5eb182b0c724 eval-reg removed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26107
diff changeset
513 *** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el.
26144
8fee653decdf Add description of changed behavior of M-w when transient-mark-mode is on.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26140
diff changeset
514
8fee653decdf Add description of changed behavior of M-w when transient-mark-mode is on.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26140
diff changeset
515 ** Not new, but not mentioned before:
8fee653decdf Add description of changed behavior of M-w when transient-mark-mode is on.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26140
diff changeset
516 M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark.
8fee653decdf Add description of changed behavior of M-w when transient-mark-mode is on.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26140
diff changeset
517
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
518
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
519 * Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
520
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
521 Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
522 --- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
523 When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
524 so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
525
26140
068f7ad41d40 Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents: 26133
diff changeset
526 ** New functions and variables for locales.
068f7ad41d40 Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents: 26133
diff changeset
527
068f7ad41d40 Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents: 26133
diff changeset
528 The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and
068f7ad41d40 Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents: 26133
diff changeset
529 decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and
068f7ad41d40 Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents: 26133
diff changeset
530 time functions like strftime. The new variables `messages-locale' and
068f7ad41d40 Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents: 26133
diff changeset
531 `time-locale' give the system locales to be used during the next
068f7ad41d40 Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents: 26133
diff changeset
532 invocations of these two types of functions; the new variables
068f7ad41d40 Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents: 26133
diff changeset
533 `previous-messages-locale' and `previous-time-locale' give the locales
068f7ad41d40 Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents: 26133
diff changeset
534 most recently used.
068f7ad41d40 Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents: 26133
diff changeset
535
068f7ad41d40 Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents: 26133
diff changeset
536 The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language
068f7ad41d40 Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents: 26133
diff changeset
537 environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from
068f7ad41d40 Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents: 26133
diff changeset
538 the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG
068f7ad41d40 Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents: 26133
diff changeset
539 environment variables. It is normally invoked during startup. It
068f7ad41d40 Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents: 26133
diff changeset
540 uses the new variables `locale-language-names',
068f7ad41d40 Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents: 26133
diff changeset
541 `locale-charset-language-names', and `locale-preferred-coding-systems'
068f7ad41d40 Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents: 26133
diff changeset
542 to make its decisions.
068f7ad41d40 Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents: 26133
diff changeset
543
26107
5bdae485eb03 *** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents: 26096
diff changeset
544 ** syntax tables now understand nested comments.
5bdae485eb03 *** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents: 26096
diff changeset
545 To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n'
5bdae485eb03 *** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents: 26096
diff changeset
546 modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment
5bdae485eb03 *** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents: 26096
diff changeset
547 start sequences.
5bdae485eb03 *** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents: 26096
diff changeset
548
25910
918acea58309 Add section for change of pixmap-spec-p to bitmap-spec-p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25862
diff changeset
549 ** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p'
918acea58309 Add section for change of pixmap-spec-p to bitmap-spec-p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25862
diff changeset
550 because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology.
918acea58309 Add section for change of pixmap-spec-p to bitmap-spec-p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25862
diff changeset
551
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
552 ** New function `propertize'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
553
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
554 The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
555 strings with text properties.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
556
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
557 - Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
558
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
559 Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
560 by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
561 PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
562 specified value of that property. Example:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
563
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
564 (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
565
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
566 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
567 ** push and pop macros.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
568
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
569 A simple version of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
570 is now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
571 as the place that holds the list to be changed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
572
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
573 (push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
574 (pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
575 (thus altering the value of LISTNAME).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
576
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
577 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
578 ** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
579 as [:alpha:], [:space:] and so on.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
580
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
581 [:digit:] matches 0 through 9
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
582 [:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
583 [:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
584 [:blank:] matches space and tab only
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
585 [:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
586 space, and DEL.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
587 [:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
588 and DEL.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
589 [:alnum:] matches letters and digits.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
590 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
591 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
592 [:alpha:] matches letters.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
593 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
594 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
595 [:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
596 [:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
597 [:lower:] matches anything lower-case.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
598 [:punct:] matches punctuation.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
599 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
600 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
601 [:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
602 [:upper:] matches anything upper-case.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
603 [:word:] matches anything that has word syntax.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
604
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
605 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
606 ** Emacs now has built-in hash tables.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
607
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
608 The following functions are defined for hash tables:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
609
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
610 - Function: make-hash-table ARGS
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
611
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
612 The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
613 are optional. The following arguments are defined:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
614
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
615 :test TEST
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
616
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
617 TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
618 Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
619 it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
620
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
621 :size SIZE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
622
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
623 SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
624 many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
625
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
626 :rehash-size REHASH-SIZE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
627
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
628 REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
629 full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
630 size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float >
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
631 1.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
632 old size. Default rehash size is 1.5.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
633
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
634 :rehash-threshold THRESHOLD
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
635
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
636 THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
637 hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) /
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
638 (size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
639
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
640 :weakness WEAK
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
641
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
642 WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value', or t.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
643 Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage collection if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
644 their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere outside of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
645 hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
646
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
647 - Function: makehash &optional TEST
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
648
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
649 Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
650
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
651 - Function: hash-table-p TABLE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
652
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
653 Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
654
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
655 - Function: copy-hash-table TABLE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
656
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
657 Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
658 values are shared.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
659
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
660 - Function: hash-table-count TABLE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
661
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
662 Returns the number of entries in TABLE.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
663
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
664 - Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
665
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
666 Returns the rehash size of TABLE.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
667
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
668 - Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
669
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
670 Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
671
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
672 - Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
673
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
674 Returns the size of TABLE.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
675
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
676 - Function: hash-table-rehash-test TABLE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
677
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
678 Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
679
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
680 - Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
681
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
682 Returns the weakness specified for TABLE.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
683
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
684 - Function: clrhash TABLE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
685
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
686 Clear TABLE.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
687
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
688 - Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
689
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
690 Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
691 not found.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
692
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
693 - Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
694
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
695 Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
696 another value, replace the old value with VALUE.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
697
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
698 - Function: remhash KEY TABLE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
699
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
700 Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
701
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
702 - Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
703
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
704 Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
705 arguments KEY and VALUE.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
706
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
707 - Function: sxhash OBJ
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
708
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
709 Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
710
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
711 - Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
712
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
713 Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
714 a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
715 comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
716 and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
717 of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
718
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
719 TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
720
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
721 HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
722 code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
723 integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
724
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
725 Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
726 be strings that are compared case-insensitively.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
727
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
728 (defun case-fold-string= (a b)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
729 (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
730
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
731 (defun case-fold-string-hash (a)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
732 (sxhash (upcase a)))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
733
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
734 (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string=
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
735 'case-fold-string-hash))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
736
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
737 (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
738
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
739 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
740 ** The Lisp reader handles circular structure.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
741
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
742 It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
743 circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
744 a cons cell which is its own cdr.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
745
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
746 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
747 ** The Lisp printer handles circular structure.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
748
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
749 If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
750 #N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
751
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
752 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
753 ** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
754 t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
755 specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
756 is too short to reach that column.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
757
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
758 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
759 ** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
760 now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
761 after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
762 two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
763
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
764 If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
765 perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
766 and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
767
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
768 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
769 ** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
770 to specify which buffer to return the size of.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
771
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
772 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
773 ** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
774 calendar-move-hook after moving point.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
775
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
776 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
777 ** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
778 directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
779 small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
780 small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
781 temporary-file-directory instead.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
782
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
783 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
784 ** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
785 the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
786 `before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
787 hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
788
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
789 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
790 ** assoc-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
791 elements of an alist which have a particular value as the car.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
792
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
793 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
794 ** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
795
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
796 make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
797 creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
798 ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
799
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
800 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
801 ** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
802
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
803 The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
804 on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
805 is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists;
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
806 never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
807 ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
808 overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
809
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
810 If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl',
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
811 that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
812 to get an error if the file exists at that time.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
813 The error reported is `file-already-exists'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
814
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
815 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
816 ** Function `format' now handles text properties.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
817
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
818 Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
819 If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
820 ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
821 result string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
822
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
823 Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
824 string where arguments appear in the result string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
825
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
826 Example:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
827
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
828 (let ((s1 "hello, %s")
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
829 (s2 "world"))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
830 (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
831 (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2)
26034
e7b463705814 Some typos fixed.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26030
diff changeset
832 (format s1 s2))
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
833
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
834 results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
835
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
836 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
837 ** Messages can now be displayed with text properties.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
838
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
839 Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
840 The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
841 argument in it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
842
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
843 (let ((msg "hello, %s!")
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
844 (arg "world"))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
845 (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
846 (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
847 (message msg arg))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
848
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
849 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
850 ** Sound support
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
851
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
852 Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
853 (Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
854
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
855 Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
856 (*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
857 to enable sound support.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
858
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
859 Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
860 list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
861 when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
862 functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
863 sound to play, before playing the sound.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
864
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
865 The following sound properties are supported:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
866
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
867 - `:file FILE'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
868
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
869 FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
870 searched relative to `data-directory'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
871
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
872 - `:volume VOLUME'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
873
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
874 VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
875 0..1. This property is optional.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
876
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
877 Other properties are ignored.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
878
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
879 ** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
880
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
881 * New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
882
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
883 Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
884 --- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
885 When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
886 so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
887
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
888 ** New face implementation.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
889
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
890 Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
891 font names anymore and face merging now works as expected.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
892
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
893 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
894 *** New faces.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
895
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
896 Each face can specify the following display attributes:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
897
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
898 1. Font family or fontset alias name.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
899
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
900 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
901 width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
902
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
903 3. Font height in 1/10pt
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
904
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
905 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
906
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
907 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
908
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
909 6. Foreground color.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
910
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
911 7. Background color.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
912
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
913 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
914
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
915 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
916
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
917 10. A background stipple, a bitmap.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
918
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
919 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
920
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
921 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
922 color.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
923
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
924 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
925 color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
926
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
927 Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
928 same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
929 frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
930 faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
931 with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each each of the face
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
932 attributes mentioned above.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
933
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
934 There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
935 definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
936 created frames.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
937
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
938 A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
939 have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
940 `fully-specified'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
941
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
942 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
943 *** Face merging.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
944
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
945 The display style of a given character in the text is determined by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
946 combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
947 aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
948 properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
949 that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
950 results in a fully-specified face.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
951
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
952 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
953 *** Face realization.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
954
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
955 After all face attributes for a character have been determined by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
956 merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
957 realization process maps face attributes to what is physically
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
958 available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
959 face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
960 cache of the frame on which it was realized.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
961
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
962 Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
963 character to display because different fonts and encodings are used
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
964 for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
965 charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
966
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
967 Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
968 specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
969 being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
970 the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
971 statically defined font name patterns in fontsets.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
972
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
973 In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
974 `char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those >
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
975 0x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
976 the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
977 initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
978 Emacs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
979
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
980 Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
981 `enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
982 registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
983 with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
984
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
985 ++++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
986 **** Clearing face caches.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
987
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
988 The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
989 on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
990 unused fonts.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
991
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
992 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
993 *** Font selection.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
994
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
995 Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
996 given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
997 for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
998
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
999 If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1000 pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1001 family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1002 property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1003 an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1004
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1005 Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1006 against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1007 match for the given face attributes in this font list.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1008
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1009 Font selection can be influenced by the user.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1010
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1011 The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1012 attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1013 face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1014 names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1015 that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1016 width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1017 to find a best match for the specified font height, etc.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1018
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1019 Setting `face-alternative-font-family-alist' allows the user to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1020 specify alternative font families to try if a family specified by a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1021 face doesn't exist.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1022
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1023 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1024 **** Scalable fonts
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1025
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1026 Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1027 since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1028 servers.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1029
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1030 To enable scalable font use, set the variable
26034
e7b463705814 Some typos fixed.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26030
diff changeset
1031 `scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1032 scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1033 Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1034 scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1035 that list. Example:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1036
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1037 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$"))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1038
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1039 allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1040
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1041 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1042 *** Functions and variables related to font selection.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1043
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1044 - Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1045
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1046 Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1047 is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1048 string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1049
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1050 If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1051 the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1052 FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1053 POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1054 SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1055 These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1056 if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1057 REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1058 the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1059 of the face font sort order.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1060
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
1061 - Function: x-font-family-list
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1062
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1063 Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1064 omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1065 (FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1066 non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1067
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1068 - Variable: font-list-limit
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1069
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1070 Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1071 won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1072 matching font. The default is currently 100.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1073
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1074 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1075 *** Setting face attributes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1076
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1077 For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1078 with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1079 implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1080 `face-attribute'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1081
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1082 Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1083 symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1084
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1085 The following attributes are recognized:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1086
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1087 `:family'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1088
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1089 VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'',
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1090 or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1091 and `?' are allowed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1092
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1093 `:width'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1094
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1095 VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1096 It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed',
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1097 `condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded',
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1098 `extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1099
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1100 `:height'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1101
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1102 VALUE must be an integer specifying the height of the font to use in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1103 1/10 pt.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1104
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1105 `:weight'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1106
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1107 VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1108 symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal',
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1109 `semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1110
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1111 `:slant'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1112
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1113 VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1114 symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1115 `reverse-oblique'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1116
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1117 `:foreground', `:background'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1118
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1119 VALUE must be a color name, a string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1120
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1121 `:underline'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1122
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1123 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1124 VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1125 a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1126 don't underline.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1127
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1128 `:overline'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1129
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1130 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1131 VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1132 string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1133 overline.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1134
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1135 `:strike-through'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1136
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1137 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1138 striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1139 face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1140 is nil, explicitly don't strike through.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1141
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1142 `:box'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1143
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1144 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1145 around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1146 VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1147 of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1148 and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1149 VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1150 :color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1151 the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1152 specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1153 defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1154 the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1155 color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1156 should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1157 like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1158 that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1159 the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1160 box.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1161
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1162 `:inverse-video'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1163
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1164 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1165 inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1166
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1167 `:stipple'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1168
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1169 If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1170 The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1171 searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1172 HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1173 is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1174 explicitly don't use a stipple pattern.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1175
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1176 For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight',
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1177 and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1178
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1179 `:font'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1180
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1181 Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1182 XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1183 is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1184 versions of Emacs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1185
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1186 For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1187 be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1188 must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed."
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1189
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1190 Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1191 `defface'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1192
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1193 *** Face attributes and X resources
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1194
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1195 The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1196 from X resources:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1197
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1198 Face attribute X resource class
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1199 -----------------------------------------------------------------------
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1200 :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1201 :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1202 :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1203 :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1204 :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1205 foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1206 :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1207 :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1208 :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1209 :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1210 :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1211 :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1212 :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
1213 or attributeBackgroundPixmap
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1214 Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1215 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1216 :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1217 :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1218 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1219
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1220 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1221 *** Text property `face'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1222
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1223 The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1224 specification or a list of such specifications. Each face
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1225 specification can be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1226
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1227 1. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1228
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1229 2. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1230 KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1231 for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1232 for face attribute names.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1233
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1234 3. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1235 (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1236 for compatibility with previous Emacs versions.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1237
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1238 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1239 ** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1240
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1241 The function `face-register-tty-color' can be used to define colors
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1242 for use on TTY frames. It maps a color name to a color number on the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1243 terminal. Emacs defines a couple of default color mappings by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1244 default. You can get defined colors with a call to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1245 `tty-defined-colors'. The function `face-clear-tty-colors' can be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1246 used to clear the mapping table.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1247
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1248 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1249 ** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer.
26062
fd35581d53c1 Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26034
diff changeset
1250
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1251 This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1252
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1253 The function minubuffer-prompt-end returns the current position of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1254 end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1255 Otherwise, it returns zero.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1256
26062
fd35581d53c1 Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26034
diff changeset
1257 ** New `field' abstraction in buffers.
fd35581d53c1 Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26034
diff changeset
1258
fd35581d53c1 Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26034
diff changeset
1259 There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs
fd35581d53c1 Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26034
diff changeset
1260 buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field'
fd35581d53c1 Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26034
diff changeset
1261 text-property.
fd35581d53c1 Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26034
diff changeset
1262
fd35581d53c1 Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26034
diff changeset
1263 Certain functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence,
fd35581d53c1 Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26034
diff changeset
1264 forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come
fd35581d53c1 Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26034
diff changeset
1265 to the boundary between fields (beginning-of-line and end-of-line will
fd35581d53c1 Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26034
diff changeset
1266 not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement
fd35581d53c1 Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26034
diff changeset
1267 commands continue into the next field if repeated).
fd35581d53c1 Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26034
diff changeset
1268
fd35581d53c1 Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26034
diff changeset
1269 The new function constrain-to-field may be used to achieve similar
fd35581d53c1 Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26034
diff changeset
1270 behavior; other new field functions include field-beginning, field-end,
fd35581d53c1 Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26034
diff changeset
1271 erase-field, and field-string.
fd35581d53c1 Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26034
diff changeset
1272
fd35581d53c1 Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26034
diff changeset
1273 Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in
fd35581d53c1 Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26034
diff changeset
1274 a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that many
fd35581d53c1 Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26034
diff changeset
1275 editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1276
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1277 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1278 ** Image support.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1279
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1280 Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1281 strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1282 (AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1283 replaces the display of the characters having that property.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1284
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1285 If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1286 `(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1287 AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1288 window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1289 area.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1290
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1291 IMAGE is an image specification.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1292
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1293 *** Image specifications
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1294
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1295 Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1296 is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1297 specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1298 symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1299
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1300 The following is a list of properties all image types share.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1301
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1302 `:ascent ASCENT'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1303
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1304 ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, and specifies the percentage
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1305 of the image's height to use for its ascent. Default is 50.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1306
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1307 `:margin MARGIN'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1308
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
1309 MARGIN must be a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put as
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1310 margin around the image. Default is 0.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1311
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1312 `:relief RELIEF'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1313
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1314 RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1315 around an image.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1316
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1317 `:algorithm ALGO'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1318
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1319 Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it. ALGO must
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1320 be a symbol specifying the algorithm. Currently only `laplace' is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1321 supported which applies a Laplace edge detection algorithm to an image
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1322 which is intended to display images "disabled."
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1323
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1324 `:heuristic-mask BG'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1325
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1326 If BG is not nil, build a clipping mask for the image, so that the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1327 background of a frame is visible behind the image. If BG is t,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1328 determine the background color of the image by looking at the 4
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1329 corners of the image, assuming the most frequently occuring color from
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1330 the corners is the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1331 be a list `(RED GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1332 background of the image.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1333
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1334 `:file FILE'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1335
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1336 Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1337 search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1338 building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1339 may be present in the image specification.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1340
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1341
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1342 *** Supported image types
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1343
26034
e7b463705814 Some typos fixed.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26030
diff changeset
1344 **** XBM, image type `xbm'.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1345
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1346 XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1347 properties supported are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1348
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1349 `:foreground FG'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1350
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1351 FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1352 is the frame's foreground.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1353
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1354 `:background FG'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1355
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1356 BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1357 the frame's background color.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1358
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1359 XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1360 case, the image specification must contain the following properties
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1361 instead of a `:file' property.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1362
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1363 `:width WIDTH'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1364
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1365 WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1366
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1367 `:height HEIGHT'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1368
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1369 HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1370
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1371 `:data DATA'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1372
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1373 DATA must be either
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1374
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1375 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1376 have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1377
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1378 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1379
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1380 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1381 bitmap.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1382
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1383 **** XPM, image type `xpm'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1384
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1385 XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1386 `xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1387 found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1388 `--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1389
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1390 Additional image properties supported are:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1391
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1392 `:color-symbols SYMBOLS'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1393
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1394 SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1395 name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1396 name.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1397
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1398 XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1399 add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1400
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1401 `:data DATA'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1402
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
1403 DATA must be a string containing an XPM image. The contents of the
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1404 string are of the same format as that of XPM files.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1405
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1406 The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1407 to display compressed images.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1408
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1409 **** PBM, image type `pbm'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1410
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1411 PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1412 mono images are supported. There are no additional image properties
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1413 defined.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1414
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1415 **** JPEG, image type `jpeg'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1416
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1417 Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg',
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1418 package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1419 properties defined.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1420
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1421 **** TIFF, image type `tiff'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1422
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1423 Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff',
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1424 package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1425 properties defined.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1426
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1427 **** GIF, image type `gif'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1428
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1429 Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1430 `libungif-4.1.0', or later.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1431
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1432 Additional image properties supported are:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1433
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1434 `:index INDEX'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1435
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1436 INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1437 multi-image GIF file. An error is signalled if INDEX is too large.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1438
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1439 This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1440 For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1441 at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1442 every 0.1 seconds.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1443
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1444 (defun show-anim (file max)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1445 "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages."
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1446 (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1447
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1448 (defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1449 (when (= idx max)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1450 (setq idx 0))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1451 (let ((img (create-image file nil :index idx)))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1452 (save-excursion
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1453 (set-buffer buffer)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1454 (goto-char (point-min))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1455 (unless first-time (delete-char 1))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1456 (insert-image img "x"))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1457 (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil)))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1458
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1459 **** PNG, image type `png'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1460
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1461 Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng',
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1462 package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1463 properties defined.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1464
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1465 **** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1466
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1467 Additional image properties supported are:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1468
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1469 `:pt-width WIDTH'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1470
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1471 WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an
26034
e7b463705814 Some typos fixed.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26030
diff changeset
1472 integer. This is a required property.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1473
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1474 `:pt-height HEIGHT'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1475
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1476 HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT
26034
e7b463705814 Some typos fixed.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26030
diff changeset
1477 must be a integer. This is an required property.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1478
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1479 `:bounding-box BOX'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1480
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1481 BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1482 the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1483 files. This is an required property.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1484
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1485 Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1486 lisp/gs.el.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1487
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1488 *** Lisp interface.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1489
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
1490 The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
1491 which are supported in the current configuration.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1492
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1493 Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1494 they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1495 The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1496 manually.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1497
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1498 *** Simplified image API, image.el
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1499
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1500 The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1501 creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1502 can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1503 define an image based on available image types. The functions
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1504 `put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1505 buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1506
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1507 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1508 ** Display margins.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1509
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1510 Windows can now have margins which are used for special text
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1511 and images.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1512
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1513 To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1514 `left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1515 `set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1516 obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1517 `right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1518 the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1519 of the display margins.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1520
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1521 You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1522 containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1523 one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1524 string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1525 in this file).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1526
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1527 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1528 ** Help display
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1529
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1530 Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1531 moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1532 `help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1533 that have a `help-echo' property.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1534
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1535 The value of the `help-echo' property must be a string. For tool-bar
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1536 items, their key definition is used to determine the help to display.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1537 If their definition contains a property `:help FORM', FORM is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1538 evaluated to determine the help string. Otherwise, the caption of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1539 tool-bar item is used.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1540
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1541 The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1542 help differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window causes the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1543 help display to appear there instead of in the echo area.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1544
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1545 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1546 ** Vertical fractional scrolling.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1547
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1548 The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1549 This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1550
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1551 The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1552 scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1553 The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1554 scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1555 used.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1556
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
1557 (global-set-key [A-down]
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
1558 #'(lambda ()
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1559 (interactive)
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
1560 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1561 (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll)))))
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
1562 (global-set-key [A-up]
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1563 #'(lambda ()
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1564 (interactive)
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
1565 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1566 (- (window-vscroll) 0.5)))))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1567
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1568 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1569 ** New hook `fontification-functions'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1570
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1571 Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1572 when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1573 variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1574 is called with one argument, POS.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1575
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1576 At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1577 characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1578 as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1579 property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1580 `fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1581
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1582 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1583 ** Tool bar support.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1584
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1585 Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1586 parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar")
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1587 controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1588 suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1589 `auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1590 automatically so that all tool bar items are visible.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1591
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1592 *** Tool bar item definitions
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1593
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1594 Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1595 `tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1596 where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
1597
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1598 CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1599 evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1600 the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1601 property (see below).
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
1602
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1603 BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1604 binding are currently ignored.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1605
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1606 The following properties are recognized:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1607
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1608 `:enable FORM'.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
1609
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1610 FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1611 or disabled.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
1612
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1613 `:visible FORM'
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
1614
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1615 FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
1616
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1617 `:filter FUNCTION'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1618
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1619 FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1620 FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1621 used instead of BINDING to display this item.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
1622
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1623 `:button (TYPE SELECTED)'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1624
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1625 TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1626 and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
1627
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1628 `:image IMAGES'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1629
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1630 IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1631 image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1632 meaning of each of the four elements:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1633
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1634 Index Use when item is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1635 ----------------------------------------
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1636 0 enabled and selected
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1637 1 enabled and deselected
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1638 2 disabled and selected
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1639 3 disabled and deselected
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
1640
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1641 `:help HELP-STRING'.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
1642
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1643 Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1644 is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1645
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1646 *** Tool-bar-related variables.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1647
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1648 If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1649 resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1650 than 1/4 of the frame's size.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1651
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
1652 If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1653 raised when the mouse moves over them.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1654
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1655 You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1656 `tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1657 pixels. Default is 1.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1658
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1659 You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1660 `tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1661
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1662 *** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1663
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1664 You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
1665 a tool bar item. If
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1666
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1667 (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell]
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1668 '(menu-item "Shell" shell
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1669 :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm")))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1670
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1671 is the original tool bar item definition, then
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1672
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1673 (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1674
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1675 makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1676 item.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1677
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1678 ** Mode line changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1679
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1680 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1681 *** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1682
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1683 The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1684 that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1685 a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1686
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1687 1. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1688 a `local-map' text property.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1689
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1690 2. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1691 that format specifier has a `local-map' property.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1692
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1693 3. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1694 is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1695 `local-map' property.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1696
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1697 The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1698 properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1699 example.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1700
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1701 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1702 *** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1703 variable mode-line-format to nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1704
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1705 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1706 *** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1707
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1708 This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1709 `header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1710 completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1711 `default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1712 line.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1713
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1714 The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1715 `header-line'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1716
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1717 The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1718 position in the header-line.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1719
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1720 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1721 ** Text property `display'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1722
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1723 The `display' text property is used to insert images into text, and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1724 also control other aspects of how text displays. The value of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1725 `display' property should be a display specification, as described
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1726 below, or a list or vector containing display specifications.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1727
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1728 *** Variable width and height spaces
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1729
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1730 To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1731 specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1732 `(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1733 area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1734 marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1735 displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1736 simpler form STRETCH as property value.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1737
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1738 The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1739 PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1740 properties described below.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1741
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1742 The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1743 characters having the `display' property.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1744
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1745 - :width WIDTH
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1746
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1747 Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1748 character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1749
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1750 - :relative-width FACTOR
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1751
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1752 Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1753 first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1754 same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1755 width of that character by FACTOR.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1756
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1757 - :align-to HPOS
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1758
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1759 Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1760 value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1761
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1762 Exactly one of the above properties should be used.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1763
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1764 - :height HEIGHT
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1765
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1766 Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1767 normal line height.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1768
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1769 - :relative-height FACTOR
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1770
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1771 The height of the space is computed as the product of the height
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1772 of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1773
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1774 - :ascent ASCENT
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1775
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1776 Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1777 used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1778 baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1779 equal to 100.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1780
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1781 You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1782
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1783 *** Images
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1784
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1785 A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1786 . IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1787 in the display, the characters having this display specification in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1788 their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)',
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1789 the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1790 `(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1791 area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1792 the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1793 as display specification.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1794
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1795 *** Other display properties
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1796
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1797 - :space-width FACTOR
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1798
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1799 Specifies that space characters in the text having that property
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1800 should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1801 integer or float.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1802
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1803 - :height HEIGHT
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1804
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1805 Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1806
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1807 If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1808 means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1809 the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1810 ``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1811 a font is available counts as a step.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1812
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1813 If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1814 as tall as the frame's default font.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1815
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1816 If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1817 height as argument. The function should return the new height to use.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1818
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1819 Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1820 `height' bound to the current specified font height.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1821
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1822 - :raise FACTOR
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1823
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1824 FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1825 font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1826 raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1827 amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1828 `:height' subproperty.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1829
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1830 *** Conditional display properties
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1831
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1832 All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1833 has the form `(:when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1834 applies only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1835 During evaluattion, point is temporarily set to the end position of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1836 the text having the `display' property.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1837
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1838 The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1839 `(:when t SPEC)'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1840
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1841 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1842 ** New menu separator types.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1843
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1844 Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1845 item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1846 treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1847 to specify other menu separator types.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1848
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1849 - `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1850
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1851 No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1852 separator occurs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1854 - `--single-line' or `--:singleLine'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1855
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1856 A single line in the menu's foreground color.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1857
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1858 - `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1859
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1860 A double line in the menu's foreground color.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1861
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1862 - `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1863
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1864 A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1865
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1866 - `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1867
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1868 A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1869
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1870 - `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1871
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1872 A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the the form
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1873 displayed for item names consisting of dashes only.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1874
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1875 - `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1876
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1877 A single line with 3D raised appearance.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1878
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1879 - `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1880
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1881 A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1882
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1883 - `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1884
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1885 A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1886
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1887 - `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1888
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1889 Two lines with 3D sunken appearance.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1890
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1891 - `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1892
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1893 Two lines with 3D raised appearance.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1894
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1895 - `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1896
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1897 Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1898
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1899 - `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1900
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1901 Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1902
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1903 Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1904 the corresponding single-line separators.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1905
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1906 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1907 ** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1908
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1909 The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1910 `scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1911 Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1912 that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1913 default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1914 default background is the background color of the frame, and the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1915 default foreground is black.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1916
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1917 The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1918 (class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1919 `ScrollBarBackground').
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1920
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1921 Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1922 settings for scroll bar colors.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1923
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1924 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1925 ** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1926 display updates from being interrupted when input is pending.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1927
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1928 ---
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1929 ** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1930 starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1931 on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1932 line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1933 the original window start.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1934
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1935 ---
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1936 ** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1937 `hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1938 now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1939
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1940 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1941 ** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1942
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1943 A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1944 `window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1945 windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1946 other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1947
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1948 The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1949 fixed-width and fixed-height.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1950
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1951 (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1952
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1953 A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1954 fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1955 window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1956 change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1957 temporarily to nil, for example
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1958
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1959 (let ((window-size-fixed nil))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1960 (enlarge-window 10))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1961
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
1962 Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically,
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1963 or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1964
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1965 * Changes in Emacs 20.4
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1966
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1967 ** Init file may be called .emacs.el.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1968
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1969 You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1970 Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1971 `.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1972
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1973 If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1974 is the one that is used.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1975
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1976 ** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1977 the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1978 Also, you can specify a place to put the error output,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1979 separate from the command's regular output.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1980 Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1981 says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1982 In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1983 the buffer name.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1984
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1985 When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1986 output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1987 it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1988 cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1989
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1990 ** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1991 the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1992 is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1993 created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1994
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1995 ** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1996 example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1997 match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1998 quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1999
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2000 ** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2001 now have the same feature as occur and query-replace:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2002 if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2003 they never ignore case.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2004
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2005 ** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2006 under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2007 applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2008 of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2009 just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2010 convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2011 part of the general feature of coding system conversion.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2012
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2013 If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2014 the same format that was used in the file before.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2015
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2016 You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2017 `inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2018
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2019 ** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2020 renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2021 This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2022
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2023 ** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2024 The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2025 buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2026 your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2027 is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2028 end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2029 Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2030
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2031 The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2032 eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2033 control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2034 format. You can now customize these variables.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2035
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2036 ** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2037 filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2038 filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2039 enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2040
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2041 ** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2042 in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2043 windows just big enough to hold the whole contents.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2044
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2045 ** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2046 dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2047 doesn't have any effect.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2048
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2049 ** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2050 not one per buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2051
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2052 ** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2053 use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2054 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2055
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2056 ** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2057 To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2058 `auto-show-mode' command.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2059
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2060 ** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2061 avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2062 versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2063 choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2064 occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2065
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2066 ** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2067 cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2068
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2069 ** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2070 character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2071 feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2072
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2073 ** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2074 the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2075 interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2076 and variable specification, as well as on the first line.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2077
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2078 ** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2079
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2080 The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2081 that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2082 one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2083 codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2084 set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2085
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2086 Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2087 from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2088
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2089 IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2090 equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2091 a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2092 `?' on other systems.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2093
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2094 IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2095 feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2096 Unix.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2097
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2098 Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2099 current codepage when it starts.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2100
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2101 ** Mail changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2102
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2103 *** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2104 default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2105 default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2106 sendmail-coding-system and the local value of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2107 buffer-file-coding-system.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2108
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2109 You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2110 sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2111 mail.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2112
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2113 *** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2114 if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2115 Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2116 list of possible coding systems.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2117
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2118 ** CC Mode changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2119
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2120 *** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2121 modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2122 longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2123 docstring for details.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2124
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2125 *** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2126 symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2127 found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2128 prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2129 lineup functions use this feature currently.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2130
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2131 *** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2132 "finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2133
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2134 *** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2135 "catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2136
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2137 *** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2138 from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2139 symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2140 c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2141 anonymous classes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2142
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2143 *** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2144 syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2145
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2146 *** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2147 inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2148 support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2149 function c-lineup-inexpr-block.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2150
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2151 *** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2152 (i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2153 brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2154 c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2155 (brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2156
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2157 *** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2158
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2159 *** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2160
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2161 *** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2162 for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2163
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2164 *** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2165
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2166 *** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2167 associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2168 This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2169 circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2170 class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2171
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2172 ** Gnus changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2173
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2174 *** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2175 added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2176 Gnus manual for the full story.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2177
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2178 *** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2179 before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2180 group, which is created automatically.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2181
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2182 *** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2183 values.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2184
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2185 *** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2186
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2187 *** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2188 outside the region: `C-c C-v'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2189
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2190 *** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2191 `C-u C-c C-c'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2192
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2193 *** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2194
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2195 *** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2196 re-highlighting of the article buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2197
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2198 *** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2199
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2200 *** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2201 Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2202
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2203 *** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2204 `a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2205
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2206 *** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2207 control over simplification.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2208
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2209 *** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2210
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2211 *** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2212 limit.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2213
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2214 *** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2215
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2216 *** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2217
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
2218 *** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2219 If you used this function in your initialization files, you must
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2220 rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2221
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2222 *** Cancelling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2223 `a' forces normal posting method.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2224
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2225 *** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2226 -- `W d'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2227
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2228 *** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2229 to a non-nil value.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2230
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2231 *** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2232 where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2233
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2234 *** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2235 has been added.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2236
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2237 *** A history of where mails have been split is available.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2238
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2239 *** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2240
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2241 *** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2242 `gnus-score-thread-simplify'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2243
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2244 *** A new function for citing in Message has been added --
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2245 `message-cite-original-without-signature'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2246
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2247 *** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2248
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2249 *** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2250 been added.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2251
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2252 *** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2253 `gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2254
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2255 *** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2256 updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2257
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2258 *** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2259
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2260 *** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2261
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2262 *** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2263
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2264 ** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2265
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2266 *** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2267 options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2268 nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "".
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2269
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2270 *** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2271 TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2272 of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2273 TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2274 can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2275
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2276 *** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2277 All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2278 but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2279 the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2280
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2281 *** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2282 the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur*
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2283 buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2284 mismatch.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2285
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2286 ** Changes to RefTeX mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2287
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2288 *** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2289 file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2290
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2291 *** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2292 lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2293 characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2294 removed from the label.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2295
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2296 *** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2297 a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2298
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2299 *** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2300 customization group `reftex-finding-files'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2301
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2302 *** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2303 `reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
2304 expressions.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2305
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2306 *** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2307
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2308 ** New/deleted modes and packages
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2309
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2310 *** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2311 SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2312
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2313 *** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2314 editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2315 SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2316
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2317 *** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2318 changes with a special face.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2319
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2320 *** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2321 this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2322 Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2323
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2324 * MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2325
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2326 ** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2327 This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2328 conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2329 and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2330 check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2331
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2332 The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2333 Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2334 distribution when the config.bat script is run.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2335
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2336 ** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2337 MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2338 controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2339 directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2340 Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2341 on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2342 string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2343 program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2344 printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2345
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2346 ** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2347 output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2348 available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2349 input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2350 temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2351 program.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2352
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2353 An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2354 and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2355 programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2356 automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2357 as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2358 ignored, as both programs have no useful switches.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2359
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2360 ** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2361 a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2362 MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2363 was not documented clearly before.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2364
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2365 ** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2366 This includes Tetris and Snake.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2367
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2368 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2369
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2370 ** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2371 return the position of the beginning or end of the current line.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2372 They both accept an optional argument, which has the same
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2373 meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2374
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2375 ** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2376 WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2377 and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2378
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2379 ** Changes in the file-attributes function.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2380
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2381 *** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2382 It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2383
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2384 *** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2385 the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2386 integers.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2387
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2388 ** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2389 files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2390 arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2391 file names and attributes are returned.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2392
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2393 ** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2394 sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2395 accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its atttributes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2396 It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2397 returns the result.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2398
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2399 ** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2400 to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2401
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2402 ** New functions for base64 conversion:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2403
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2404 The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2405 into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2406 performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2407 optionally.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2408
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2409 Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2410 job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2411
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2412 **
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2413 The new function process-running-child-p
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2414 will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2415 terminal to its own child process.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2416
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2417 ** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2418 when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2419 to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2420 itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2421
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2422 ** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2423 be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2424
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2425 ** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2426 :included is an alias for :visible.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2427
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2428 easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2429 easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2430 to move or copy menu entries.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2431
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2432 ** Multibyte editing changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2433
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2434 *** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2435 an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2436 make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2437 work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2438 char-bytes in a loop typically as below:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2439 (setq char (sref str idx)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2440 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx)))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2441 The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2442
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2443 If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2444 (say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2445 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2446
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2447 *** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2448 region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2449 deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2450
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2451 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibitted
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2452
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2453 This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2454 across the boundary.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2455
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2456 *** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2457 `unknown' in the returned list in the following cases:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2458 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2459 contains 8-bit characters.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2460 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2461 contains invalid characters.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2462
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2463 *** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2464 text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2465 preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2466 text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2467 way.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2468
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2469 *** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2470 If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2471 end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2472 prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2473
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2474 *** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2475 compose Thai characters in a string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2476
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2477 ** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2478 argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2479 for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2480 menus should always use the third argument.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2481
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2482 ** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2483 read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2484 arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2485 input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2486
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2487 ** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2488 of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2489 programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2490 inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2491
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2492 ** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2493 the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2494 returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2495 echo area contents.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2496
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2497 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2498
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2499 ** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2500 NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2501 requested feature cannot be loaded.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2502
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2503 ** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2504 foreground color, background color or stipple pattern
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
2505 means to clear out that attribute.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2506
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2507 ** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2508 gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2509
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2510 ** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2511 read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2512 unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2513 end of with-output-to-temp-buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2514
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2515 ** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2516 the gap of the current buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2517
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2518 ** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2519 to convert between character positions and byte positions in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2520 current buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2521
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2522 ** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2523 facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2524 These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2525 it back in after any modifications have been made.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2526
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2527 * Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2528
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2529 ** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2530 the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2531 /usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2532 directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2533 subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2534
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2535 Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2536 names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2537 Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2538 which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2539 these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2540
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2541 Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2542 starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2543 time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2544
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2545 This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2546 Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2547 to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2548 subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2549 `.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2550 results.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2551
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2552 ** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2553 GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2554 that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2555 fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2556
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2557 * Changes in Emacs 20.3
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2558
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2559 ** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2560 including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2561 it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2562 perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2563
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2564 ** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2565 specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2566 region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2567 further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2568 command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2569 within the region you originally specified, until either all of them
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2570 are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2571 region.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2572
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2573 In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2574 selective undo.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2575
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2576 ** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2577 unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2578 buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2579 effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2580 Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2581
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2582 The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2583 though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2584 -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2585 load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2586
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2587 ** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2588 no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2589 enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2590 something that most users not do.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2591
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2592 ** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2593 operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2594 The coding system can make a difference for communication with other
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2595 applications.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2596
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2597 C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2598 pasting operations.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2599
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2600 ** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2601 setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2602 like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2603 printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2604 `ps-printer-name'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2605
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2606 ** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2607 minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2608 any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2609 except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2610 incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2611 hits a new word.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2612
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2613 Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2614 Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2615 to be confused by TeX commands.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2616
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2617 You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2618 correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2619 clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2620 of various alternative replacements and actions.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2621
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2622 Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2623 the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2624 corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2625 alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2626 flyspell-sort-corrections is nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2627
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2628 Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2629 flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2630
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2631 ** Changes in input method usage.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2632
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2633 Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2634 the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2635 respectively.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2636
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2637 You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2638
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2639 If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2640 of the alternatives with Mouse-2.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2641
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2642 The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2643 that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2644
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2645 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2646
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2647 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2648
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2649 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2650 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2651
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2652 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
2653 given in the following case:
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2654 o When you are using a complex input method.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2655 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2656
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2657 If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2658 input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2659 and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2660 setting it to t is helpful.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2661
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2662 The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2663
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2664 In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2665 keys:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2666 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2667 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2668 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2669 These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2670 environment.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2671
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2672 ** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2673 names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2674 minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2675 get
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2676
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2677 /usr/foo//etc/passwd
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2678
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2679 which stands for the file /etc/passwd.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2680
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2681 Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2682 Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2683
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2684 ** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2685 at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2686 its owner and group.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2687
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2688 ** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2689 Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2690
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2691 ** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2692 contents before inserting the specified string on each line.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2693
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2694 ** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2695 which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2696 in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2697 by the left edge of the rectangle.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2698
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2699 ** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2700 increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2701 C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2702 for writing keyboard macros.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2703
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2704 ** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2705 files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2706 frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2707 the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2708 additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2709 info.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2710
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2711 ** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2712
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2713 ** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2714 query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2715 contents only.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2716
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2717 ** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2718 confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2719 the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2720 says whether to ask for confirmation in this case.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2721
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2722 ** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2723 non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2724 literally. If you say no, it signals an error.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2725
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2726 ** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2727 now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2728 Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2729 inconsistent with Emacs conventions.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2730
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2731 ** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2732 failure if the command produces no output.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2733
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2734 ** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2735 manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2736 the mouse.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2737
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2738 ** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2739 mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2740 function and variable names.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2741
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2742 ** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2743 reading specific files. This has higher priority than
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2744 file-coding-system-alist.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2745
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2746 ** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2747 t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2748 converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2749 the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2750 according to the current fontset.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2751
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2752 ** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2753
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2754 The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2755 that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2756 nonascii-insert-offset.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2757
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2758 For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2759 enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2760 nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2761 characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2762
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2763 ** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2764 an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2765
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2766 ** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2767 letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2768
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2769 ** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2770 are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2771 command keys.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2772
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2773 ** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2774 user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2775
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2776 Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2777 user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2778 all variables that have documentation.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2779
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2780 ** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2781 shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2782 that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2783 minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2784 it should show; the default is 20.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2785
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2786 Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2787 the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2788 of your input.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2789
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2790 ** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2791 all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2792 recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2793 argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2794 the customizable options which were changed since that version.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2795 Newly added options are included as well.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2796
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2797 If you don't specify a particular version number argument,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2798 then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2799 for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2800
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2801 This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2802 Customize menu.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2803
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2804 ** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2805 the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2806
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2807 ** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2808 buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2809 invoked.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2810
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2811 ** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2812 that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2813 The default is 1.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2814
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2815 ** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2816 syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2817 new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2818 (C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2819 sensibly.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2820
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2821 ** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2822
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2823 ** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2824 value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2825 two entries in one day for one file, and combine them.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2826
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2827 ** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2828 reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2829 for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2830 every night.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2831
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2832 ** All you need to do, to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2833 the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2834
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2835 ** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2836 read and post multi-lingual articles.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2837
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2838 ** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2839 doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2840 be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2841 outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2842 the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
2843 made invisible again.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2844
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2845 ** Mail reading and sending changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2846
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2847 *** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2848 the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2849 changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2850 toggle.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2851
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2852 *** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2853 now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2854 summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2855 the message has no subject, is stored in the variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2856 rmail-default-body-file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2857
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2858 *** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2859 longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2860 handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2861
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2862 *** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2863 it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2864 is evaluated to insert the signature.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2865
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2866 *** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2867 outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2868 handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2869 putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2870 transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2871 especially interested in trying feedmail.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2872
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2873 feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2874 feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2875 provided by feedmail are:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2876
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2877 **** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2878 stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users);
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2879 there is also a queue for draft messages
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2880
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2881 **** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2882 be prompted for confirmation
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2883
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2884 **** does smart filling of address headers
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2885
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2886 **** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2887 the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2888 can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2889
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2890 **** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2891 the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2892 /usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2893 function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2894
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2895 ** Dired changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2896
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2897 *** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2898 files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T".
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2899
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2900 *** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2901 run Dired on the directory name at point.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2902
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2903 *** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2904 files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2905 for a specified regexp.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2906
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2907 ** VC Changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2908
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2909 *** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2910 conveniently.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2911
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2912 *** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2913 faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2914 Dired.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2915
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2916 VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2917 directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2918 listing of all files at or below the given directory which are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2919 currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2920
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2921 You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2922 then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2923 vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2924 control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2925 on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2926
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2927 All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2928 is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2929 `v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2930 the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2931 `vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2932
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2933 The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2934 toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
2935 VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command,
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2936 `* l', to mark all files currently locked.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2937
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2938 Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2939 ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2940 command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2941
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2942 *** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2943 file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2944 session to resolve them.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2945
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2946 Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2947 resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2948 contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2949 uses as well).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2950
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2951 *** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2952 command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2953 you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2954 either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2955 branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2956 If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2957 using ediff.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2958
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2959 ** Changes in Font Lock
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2960
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2961 *** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2962 are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2963 use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2964 unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2965 compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2966
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2967 ** Frame name display changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2968
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2969 *** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2970 frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2971 raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2972 when many frames are invisible or iconified.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2973
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2974 *** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2975 frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2976 menu.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2977
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2978 ** Comint (subshell) changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2979
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2980 *** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2981 subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2982 with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2983
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2984 *** There are new commands in Comint mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2985
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2986 C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history;
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2987 that is, the line after the last line you got.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2988 You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2989
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2990 C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2991 send the current line together with the following line, when you send
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2992 the following line.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2993
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2994 C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2995 which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2996 previously sent input.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2997
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2998 C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input;
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2999 it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3000 as the search string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3001
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3002 *** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3003 automatically in compilation-mode windows.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3004
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3005 ** C mode changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3006
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3007 *** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3008 and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3009 assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
3010 definition.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3011
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3012 *** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3013 (i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3014 Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu"
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3015 style is still the default however.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3016
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3017 *** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3018
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3019 *** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3020 are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3021 them. They do not have key bindings by default.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3022
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3023 *** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3024 and M-e (c-end-of-statement).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3025
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3026 *** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3027 namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3028
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3029 *** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3030 makes the style variables local to that buffer only.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3031
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3032 *** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3033 c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3034
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3035 *** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3036 should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3037 package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3038 variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3039
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3040 ** Changes to hippie-expand.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3041
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
3042 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3043 non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3044 which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3045
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3046 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3047 non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3048 expanding dynamically.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3049
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3050 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3051 non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3052
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3053 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3054 non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3055 this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3056 expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3057
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3058 *** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3059
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3060 ** Changes in BibTeX mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3061
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3062 *** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3063 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3064 automatic key generation. This replaces variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3065 bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3066 against the first word in the title.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3067
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3068 *** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3069 capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3070 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
3071 lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3072 lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
3073 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3074
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3075 *** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3076 generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3077 replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3078 bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3079
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3080 ** Changes in vcursor.el.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3081
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3082 *** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3083 and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3084 variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3085 entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3086 `vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3087 in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3088
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3089 *** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3090 Editing group once the package is loaded.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3091
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3092 *** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3093 generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3094 vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behaviour.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3095
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3096 *** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3097 vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3098
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3099 ** Ispell changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3100
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
3101 *** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
3102 buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3103 are identified by syntax tables in effect.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3104
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3105 *** Generic region skipping implemented.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3106 A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3107 and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3108 defined. New applications and improvements made available by this
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
3109 include:
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3110
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3111 o URLs are automatically skipped
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3112 o EMail message checking is vastly improved.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3113
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3114 *** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3115
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3116 ** Changes to RefTeX mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3117
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3118 RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3119 large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3120 re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3121 section `Optimizations' in the manual.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3122
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3123 *** New recursive parser.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3124
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3125 The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3126 entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3127 recursive parser scans the individual files.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3128
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3129 *** Parsing only part of a document.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
3130
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3131 Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3132 partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3133 the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3134
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3135 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3136
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3137 *** Storing parsing information in a file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3138
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3139 This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3140
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3141 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3142
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3143 *** Using multiple selection buffers
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3144
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3145 If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3146 for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3147
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3148 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3149
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3150 *** References to external documents.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3151
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3152 The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3153 documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3154 documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3155 macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3156 RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3157 the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )').
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3158 The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3159
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3160 *** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3161
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3162 The builtin command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3163 and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3164
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3165 Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3166 the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3167
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3168 *** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3169
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3170 The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc*
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3171 buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3172
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3173 *** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3174
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3175 The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3176 contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map',
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3177 `reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3178 have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3179 enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3180 at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3181 more.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3182
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3183 *** Support for the varioref package
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3184
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3185 The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3186
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3187 *** New hooks
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3188
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3189 Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3190 and citations are created. These hooks are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3191 `reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function',
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3192 `reftex-format-cite-function'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3193
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3194 *** Citations outside LaTeX
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3195
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3196 The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3197 a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3198
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3199 *** Short context is no longer fontified.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3200
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3201 The short context in the label menu no longer copies the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3202 fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3203 fontified, use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3204
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3205 (setq reftex-refontify-context t)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3206
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3207 ** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3208 With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3209 the file name within its directory; it only checks for other
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3210 directories that contain the same file name.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3211
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3212 Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3213 Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3214 file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3215 Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3216 have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3217 names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3218 directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3219 directory.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3220
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3221 ** New modes and packages
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3222
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3223 *** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3224 It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3225 it, but some do not.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3226
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3227 *** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3228 code.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3229
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3230 *** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3231 current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3232 around in a buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3233
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3234 Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3235
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3236 *** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3237 uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3238 be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3239 established system of notation similar to Chess.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3240
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3241 *** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3242 documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3243 guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3244
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3245 *** The net-utils package makes some common networking features
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3246 available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3247 system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3248 simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3249 functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3250 the like.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3251
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3252 *** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3253 identify recently changed parts of the buffer text.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3254
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3255 *** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3256 within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3257 used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3258 the user option `midnight-mode' to t.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3259
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3260 *** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3261
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3262 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3263 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3264 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3265 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3266 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3267 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3268 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3269 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3270 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3271 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3272 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3273
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3274 Platform-specific modes:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3275
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3276 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3277 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3278 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3279 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3280 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3281 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3282 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3283 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3284 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3285
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3286 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3287
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3288 ** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3289 use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3290 That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3291 Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3292
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3293 Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3294 you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3295 consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3296
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3297 ** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3298 and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3299 specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3300 searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3301
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3302 ** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3303 multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3304 character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3305 environment.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3306
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3307 ** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3308 take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3309 string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3310 current input method for reading this one event.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3311
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3312 ** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3313 now control whether to output certain characters as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3314 backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3315 non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3316 characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3317 in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3318
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3319 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3320
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3321 ** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3322 of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3323
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3324 ** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3325 in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3326 always increases point by 1.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3327
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3328 The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3329 considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3330
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3331 See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3332
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3333 ** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3334 Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3335 default value changed. For example,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3336
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3337 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed."
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3338 :type 'integer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3339 :group 'foo
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3340 :version "20.3")
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3341
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
3342 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group."
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3343 :version "20.3")
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3344
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3345 If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3346 default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3347 is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3348 `:version' in the top level group.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3349
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3350 This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3351
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3352 ** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3353 starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3354
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3355 However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3356 symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3357 support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3358 to themselves.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3359
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3360 If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3361 this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3362 values whatever.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3363
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3364 ** There is a new debugger command, R.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3365 It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3366 in the buffer *Debugger-record*.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3367
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3368 ** Frame-local variables.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3369
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3370 You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3371 the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3372 local bindings for that variable.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3373
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3374 These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3375 frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3376 modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3377 parameter name.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3378
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3379 Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3380 Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3381 active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3382 that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3383
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3384 It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3385 clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3386 very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3387 through a window-local binding would not be very robust.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3388
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3389 ** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3390 "symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3391 evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3392 makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3393 See the documentation in sregex.el.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3394
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3395 ** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3396 is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3397 parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3398 The contents of this field are not yet finalized.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3399
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3400 ** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3401 If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3402
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3403 ** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3404 known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3405 define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3406
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3407 ** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3408 when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3409 it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3410 history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3411
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3412 The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3413 return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3414 empty input.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3415
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3416 ** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3417 for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3418 `iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3419 Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3420 `read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3421
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3422 ** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3423 echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3424 a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3425 default password to use if the user enters nothing.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3426
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3427 ** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3428 specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3429 function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3430 place where a break is being considered. If the function returns
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3431 non-nil, then the line won't be broken there.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3432
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3433 ** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3434 If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3435 up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3436 end of the window, even if this requires computation.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3437
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3438 ** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3439 which specifies which frame's buffer list to use.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3440 If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3441
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3442 ** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3443 holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3444 was directed to display this buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3445
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3446 ** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3447 with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3448 describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3449 other words, if they would give the same results if passed to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3450 set-window-configuration.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3451
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3452 ** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3453 window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3454 positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3455 windows and the choice of buffers to display.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3456
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3457 ** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3458 override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3459 look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3460
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3461 If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3462 non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3463 map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3464
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3465 minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3466 and it is meant to be set by major modes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3467
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3468 ** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3469 except that it discards all text properties from the result.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3470
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3471 ** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3472 USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3473 floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3474
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3475 ** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3476 to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3477 in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3478 it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3479
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3480 ** Menu changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3481
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3482 *** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3483 keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3484 better supported.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3485
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3486 The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3487 a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3488 you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3489 can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature;
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3490 then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3491
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3492 *** A new format for menu items is supported.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3493
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3494 In a keymap, a key binding that has the format
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3495 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3496 defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3497 starts with the symbol `menu-item'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3498
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3499 The format is:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3500 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3501 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3502 where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3503 string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3504 The supported properties include
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3505
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3506 :enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3507 item is enabled.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3508 :visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3509 item should appear in the menu.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
3510 :filter FILTER-FN
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3511 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3512 which will be REAL-BINDING.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3513 It should return a binding to use instead.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3514 :keys DESCRIPTION
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3515 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3516 binding for for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3517 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3518 :key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3519 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3520 keyboard binding.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3521 :key-sequence nil
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3522 This means that the command normally has no
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3523 keyboard equivalent.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3524 :help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3525 :button (TYPE . SELECTED)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3526 TYPE is :toggle or :radio.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3527 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3528 value says whether this button is currently selected.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3529
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3530 Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3531 Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3532
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3533 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3534
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3535 ** New event types
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3536
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3537 *** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3538 mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3539 corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3540 which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3541
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3542 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3543
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3544 where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3545 same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3546 indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3547 negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3548 the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3549 forward, away from the user.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3550
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3551 As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3552
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3553 *** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3554 files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3555 and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3556 filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3557 loaded into Emacs. The format is:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3558
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3559 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3560
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3561 where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3562 same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3563 that were dragged and dropped.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3564
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3565 As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3566
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3567 ** Changes relating to multibyte characters.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3568
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3569 *** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only;
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3570 any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3571 to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3572
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3573 *** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3574 can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3575 that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3576
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3577 *** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3578 in Emacs 19 and before.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3579
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3580 The function chars-in-string has been deleted.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3581 The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3582
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3583 *** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3584 buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3585 unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3586 representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3587
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3588 This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3589 as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3590 viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3591 one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3592 will count as two characters using unibyte representation.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3593
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3594 This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3595 representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3596 (including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3597 consistent with the new representation.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3598
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3599 *** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3600 representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3601 about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary;
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3602 however, it makes a difference when you compare strings.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3603
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3604 The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3605 nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3606 using the table nonascii-translation-table.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3607
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3608 *** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3609 representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3610 representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3611
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3612 The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3613 loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3614 is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3615
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3616 *** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3617 which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3618
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3619 *** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3620 which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3621
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3622 *** The new function compare-strings lets you compare
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3623 portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3624 so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3625 You can specify whether to ignore case or not.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3626
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3627 *** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3628 it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3629
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3630 *** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3631 convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3632 buffer or string being searched.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3633
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3634 One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3635 [...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3636 searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3637 searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3638 obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3639 you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3640 expression [^\0-\177] works for it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3641
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3642 *** Structure of coding system changed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3643
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3644 All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3645 by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3646 which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3647 as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3648 vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3649 your own alias name of a coding system by the function
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3650 define-coding-system-alias.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3651
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3652 The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3653 the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3654 access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3655 pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3656 character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3657 safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3658 'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3659 `iso-8859-1'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3660
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3661 Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3662 The value of this property is a list of character sets which this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3663 coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3664 (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3665
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3666 Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3667 also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3668 are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3669 the other character sets and read it back correctly.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3670
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3671 *** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3672 proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3673 This function requires a user interaction.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3674
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3675 *** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3676 find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3677 select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3678 systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3679 a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3680 select-safe-coding-system.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3681
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3682 *** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3683 decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3684 last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3685 was done.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3686
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3687 *** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3688 used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3689 coding systems used by some specific language environment.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3690
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3691 *** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3692 return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3693 characters are found, they now return a list of single element
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3694 `undecided' or its subsidiaries.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3695
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3696 *** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3697 coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3698 coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3699 converted.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3700
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3701 *** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3702 coding system for communicating with other X clients.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3703
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3704 *** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3705 character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3706 character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3707 each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3708 either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3709 range of characters.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3710
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3711 *** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3712 Lisp object is a valid character code or not.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3713
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3714 *** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3715 in the current buffer at position POS.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3716
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3717 *** Input methods are now implemented using the variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3718 input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3719 function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3720 character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3721 event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3722 binding input-method-function to nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3723
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3724 The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3725 method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3726 input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3727 the input method function are not passed to the input method function,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3728 not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3729
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3730 The input method function is not called when reading the second and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3731 subsequent events of a key sequence.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3732
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3733 *** You can customize any language environment by using
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3734 set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3735
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3736 The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3737 customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3738 instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3739 environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3740 exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3741
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3742 * Changes in Emacs 20.1
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3743
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3744 ** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3745 options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3746 at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3747 tree structure.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3748
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3749 M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3750 user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3751
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3752 With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3753 session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3754 in your .emacs file.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3755
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3756 ** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3757 You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3758
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3759 ** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3760 This makes more space in the mode line for other information.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3761
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3762 ** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3763 immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3764 kills the region.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3765
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3766 The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3767 delete the character before point, as usual.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3768
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3769 ** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3770 on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3771 by setting search-highlight to nil.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3772
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3773 ** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3774 insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3775 the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3776 onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3777 history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3778 past.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3779
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3780 ** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3781 This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3782 in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3783 TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3784 makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3785
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3786 As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3787 and is an alias for it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3788
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3789 If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3790 use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3791
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3792 ** Scrolling changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3793
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3794 *** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3795 position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3796
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3797 In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3798 on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3799 where it started.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3800
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3801 *** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3802 move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3803 screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3804 does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3805
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3806 *** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3807 top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3808 comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3809 recenters the window.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3810
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3811 ** International character set support (MULE)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3812
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3813 Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3814 including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3815 Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3816 Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3817 features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3818 MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs")
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3819
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3820 Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3821 coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3822 character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3823 variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3824 into any of these coding systems when saving a file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3825
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3826 Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3827 generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3828 supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3829 language, to make it possible to type them.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3830
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3831 The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3832 character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3833
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3834 The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3835 to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3836
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3837 You can disable multibyte character support as follows:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3838
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3839 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3840
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3841 Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3842 characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3843 argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3844 already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3845 characters for their work until they want to change.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3846
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3847 *** Input methods
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3848
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3849 An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3850 specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3851 has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3852 the same characters can share one input method). Some languages
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3853 support several input methods.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3854
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3855 The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3856 another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3857 work.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3858
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3859 A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3860 characters into one letter. Many European input methods use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3861 composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3862 consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3863 sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3864 letter.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3865
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3866 The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3867 by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3868 First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3869 marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3870 mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character".
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3871
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3872 None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3873 they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3874 phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3875 converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3876
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3877 Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3878 word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use;
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3879 typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3880 the first guess is wrong.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3881
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3882 *** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3883 turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3884
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3885 If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3886 byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3887 they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3888 the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3889
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3890 However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3891 use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3892 includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3893 translate automatically to and from either one.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3894
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3895 *** Visiting a file in unibyte mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3896
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3897 Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3898 file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3899 sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3900 what you want.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3901
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3902 If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3903 example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3904 system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3905 multibyte characters in that buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3906
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3907 If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3908 character conversion as well.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3909
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3910 *** Displaying international characters on X Windows.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3911
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3912 A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3913 Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3914 requires using many fonts.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3915
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3916 Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3917 collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3918
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3919 A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3920 the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3921 have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3922 you would use a font.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3923
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3924 If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3925 specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3926 display that character. It will display an empty box instead.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3927
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3928 The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3929 (that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3930 characters). If another font in the fontset has a different height,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3931 or the wrong width, then characters assigned to that font are clipped,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3932 and displayed within a box if highlight-wrong-size-font is non-nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3933
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3934 *** Defining fontsets.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3935
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3936 Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3937 chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3938 with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3939
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3940 Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3941 of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3942 `fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3943 standard fontset are created automatically.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3944
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3945 If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3946 argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3947 FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3948 with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3949 name is `fontset-startup'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3950
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3951 Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2...
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3952 The resource value should have this form:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3953 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]...
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3954 FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3955 * most fields should be just the wild card "*".
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3956 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset"
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3957 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3958 The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3959 of times; each time specifies the font for one character set.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3960 CHARSET-NAME should be the name name of a character set, and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3961 FONT-NAME should specify an actual font to use for that character set.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3962
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3963 Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3964 last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3965 You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3966
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3967 For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3968 font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3969 following resource,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3970 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3971 the font for ASCII is generated as below:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3972 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3973 Here is the substitution rule:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3974 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3975 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3976 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3977 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3978 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3979
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3980 The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3981 fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3982 that function explicitly to create a fontset.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3983
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3984 With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3985 like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3986 name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3987 fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3988 fontsets.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3989
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3990 *** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3991 defaults for a particular choice of language.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3992
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3993 Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3994 method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3995 visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3996 already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3997 language environment may also specify a default choice of coding
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3998 system for new files that you create.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3999
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4000 It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4001 set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4002 whole Emacs session.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4003
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4004 For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4005 chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4006 with (set-language-environment "Latin-1").
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4007
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4008 *** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4009 specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4010 specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4011 the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4012 coding systems that Emacs supports.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4013
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4014 *** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4015 lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4016 This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4017 After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4018 is used for *the immediately following command*.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4019
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4020 So if the immediately following command is a command to read or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4021 write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4022
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4023 If the immediately following command does not use the coding system,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4024 then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4025
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4026 For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4027 visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4028
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4029 *** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*-
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4030 construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*-
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4031 to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4032 specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4033 of the file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4034
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4035 *** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4036 the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4037 code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4038 translated into that character code.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4039
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4040 This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4041 various countries to support the languages of those countries.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4042
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4043 By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4044
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4045 *** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4046 the coding system for keyboard input.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4047
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4048 Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4049 with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4050 some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4051
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4052 By default, keyboard input is not translated at all.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4053
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4054 Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4055 input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4056 translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4057 to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4058 designed to work with terminals.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4059
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4060 *** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4061 specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4062 This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4063 has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4064 translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4065 in the corresponding buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4066
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4067 By default, process input and output are not translated at all.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4068
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4069 *** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4070 to use for encoding file names before operating on them.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4071 It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4072
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4073 *** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4074 an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4075 command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4076 want to use.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4077
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4078 C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4079 method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4080
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4081 *** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4082 layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4083 remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4084 which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4085
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4086 *** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4087 the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4088 related information.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4089
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4090 *** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4091 HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4092 scripts.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4093
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4094 *** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4095 information about the support for a particular language.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4096 You specify the language as an argument.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4097
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4098 *** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4099 the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4100 first dash.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4101
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4102 A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4103 (except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4104 whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4105 1 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4106
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4107 A alternativnyj (Russian)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4108 B big5 (Chinese)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4109 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4110 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4111 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4112 E euc-japan (Japanese)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4113 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4114 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4115 K euc-korea (Korean)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4116 R koi8 (Russian)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4117 Q tibetan
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4118 S shift_jis (Japanese)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4119 T lao
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4120 T tis620 (Thai)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4121 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4122 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4123 k iso-2022-kr (Korean)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4124 v viqr (Vietnamese)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4125 z hz (Chinese)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4126
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4127 When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system),
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4128 two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4129 coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4130 keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4131
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4132 *** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4133 conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4134
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4135 When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4136 into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4137 rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4138 Rmail files themselves.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4139
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4140 *** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4141 conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4142
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4143 Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4144 for sending mail:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4145
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4146 - If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4147 - Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4148 - Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4149 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4150 - Otherwise, Latin-1 is used.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4151
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4152 *** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4153 to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4154 Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4155 translations.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4156
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4157 ** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4158 of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4159 insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4160 without any conversion.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4161
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4162 ** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4163 You can now specify any number of octal digits.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4164 RET terminates the digits and is discarded;
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4165 any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4166
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4167 ** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4168 functions, variables and file names used in your programs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4169
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4170 Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4171 Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4172
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4173 Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4174 mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4175
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4176 ** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4177 complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4178 in the buffer before point.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4179
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4180 With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4181 symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4182 you are using.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4183
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4184 With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4185 just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4186
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4187 ** File locking works with NFS now.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4188
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4189 The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4190 in the same directory as FILENAME.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4191
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4192 This means that collision detection between two different machines now
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4193 works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4194 can become a bottleneck.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4195
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4196 The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4197 does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4198 create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4199 file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4200 rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4201 so useful that the change is worth while.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4202
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4203 When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4204 are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4205 collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4206 tell Emacs to go ahead anyway.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4207
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4208 ** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4209 it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4210 show-paren-mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4211
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4212 ** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4213 selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4214 delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4215
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4216 ** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4217 within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4218 complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4219
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4220 ** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4221 it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4222 set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4223
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4224 ** Changes in View mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4225
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4226 *** Several new commands are available in View mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4227 Do H in view mode for a list of commands.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4228
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4229 *** There are two new commands for entering View mode:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4230 view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4231
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4232 *** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4233 previous state.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4234
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4235 *** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4236 scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4237
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4238 *** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4239 non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4240 not just the selected window.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4241
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4242 *** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4243 read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4244 turns View mode on or off.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4245
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4246 *** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4247 how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4248 delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4249
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4250 ** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4251 now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4252
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4253 ** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4254 has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4255 presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4256 which version to compare with.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4257
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4258 ** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
4259 blocks if a match is inside the block.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4260
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4261 The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4262 is outside the block. By customizing the variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4263 isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4264 shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4265
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4266 By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4267 of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4268 blocks, all of them or none.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4269
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4270 ** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4271 current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4272 confirmation first.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4273
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4274 ** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4275 now changes the major mode according to that file name.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4276 However, the mode will not be changed if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4277 (1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4278 (2) the current major mode is a "special" mode,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4279 not suitable for ordinary files, or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4280 (3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4281
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4282 This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4283
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4284 However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4285 these commands do not change the major mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4286
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4287 ** M-x occur changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4288
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4289 *** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4290 it performs a case-sensitive search.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4291
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4292 *** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4293 if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4294 using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4295
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4296 ** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4297 in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4298 window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4299 that window unless you select to another window which shows the same
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4300 buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4301
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4302 ** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4303 after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4304 appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4305 come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4306
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4307 ** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4308 selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4309 buffers recently selected in the selected frame.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4310
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4311 ** Outline mode changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4312
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4313 *** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4314
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4315 *** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4316
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4317 ** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4318 you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4319 Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4320 was already active.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4321
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4322 The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4323 unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4324 get confused by it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4325
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4326 If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4327 set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4328
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4329 ** Changes in dynamic abbrevs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4330
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4331 *** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4332 conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4333 character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4334 including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4335
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4336 The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4337 mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4338 copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4339
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4340 *** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4341 are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4342 values.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4343
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4344 `dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4345 case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4346 `dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4347 case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4348
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4349 ** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4350 certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4351 can be. The default value is 30.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4352
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4353 ** Changes in Mail mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4354
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4355 *** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4356 Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4357 composition mechanism you have selected with the variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4358 `mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4359 `sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4360 behavior.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4361
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4362 C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4363 compose-mail-other-frame.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4364
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4365 *** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4366 the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4367 replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4368 buffer that shows the original message.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4369
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4370 *** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4371 with separator lines around the contents.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4372
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4373 *** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4374 in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4375 definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4376 need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4377
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4378 *** New features in the mail-complete command.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4379
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4380 **** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4381 for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4382 controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4383 Its values are like those of mail-from-style.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4384
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4385 **** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4386 to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4387 /etc/passwd.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4388
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4389 **** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4390 to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4391 /etc/passwd.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4392
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4393 ** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4394 special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4395 directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4396 reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4397
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4398 Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4399 when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4400 be taken to be magic.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4401
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4402 ** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4403 files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4404 available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4405
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4406 M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4407 (-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4408
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4409 ** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4410 suggest they are probably not needed in the long run.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4411
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4412 In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4413
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4414 new key dired.el binding old key
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4415 ------- ---------------- -------
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4416 * c dired-change-marks c
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4417 * m dired-mark m
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4418 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4419 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4420 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4421 * u dired-unmark u
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4422 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4423 * ? dired-unmark-all-files M-C-?
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4424 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4425 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4426 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-}
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4427 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4428
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4429 ** Rmail changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4430
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4431 *** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4432 saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4433 chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4434 each time you run it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4435
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4436 *** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4437 whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4438
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4439 *** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4440 messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4441 means to move in the opposite direction.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4442
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4443 *** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4444 you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4445
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4446 *** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4447 just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4448 It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4449 can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4450 for output.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4451
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4452 ** Gnus changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4453
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4454 *** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4455
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
4456 *** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
4457 Gnus.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
4458
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
4459 *** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4460 `and', `or', `not', and parent redirection.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4461
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4462 *** Article washing status can be displayed in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4463 article mode line.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4464
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4465 *** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4466
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4467 *** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4468
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4469 (setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4470
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4471 *** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4472 are to be considered home score and adapt files. See
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4473 `gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4474
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4475 *** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4476
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4477 *** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4478
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4479 *** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4480 See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4481
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4482 *** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4483 Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4484 used to pick articles.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4485
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4486 *** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4487 another have been added.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4488
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4489 `M-x gnus-change-server'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4490
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4491 *** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4492 generating lines in buffers.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4493
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4494 *** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4495 `M-C-_'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4496
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4497 *** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4498
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4499 *** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4500
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4501 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4502
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4503 *** Scores can be decayed.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
4504
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4505 (setq gnus-decay-scores t)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4506
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4507 *** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4508 Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4509
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4510 *** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4511 the native server.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4512
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4513 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4514
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4515 *** A new command for reading collections of documents
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4516 (nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `M-C-d'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4517
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4518 *** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4519
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4520 *** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4521 even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4522
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4523 *** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4524 (DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4525
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4526 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4527 a group.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4528
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4529 *** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4530 sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4531
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4532 See the commands under the `T S' submap.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4533
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4534 *** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4535
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4536 See the commands under the `G P' submap.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4537
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4538 *** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
4539
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4540 Use the `Y c' command.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4541
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4542 *** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4543
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4544 *** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4545
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4546 `M-x nnmail-split-history'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4547
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4548 *** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4549 from incoming mail before saving the mail.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
4550
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4551 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4552
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4553 *** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4554
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4555 *** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4556 the following code, for instance, in your .emacs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4557
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4558 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4559
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4560 Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4561 and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4562 from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4563 hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4564 this issue.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4565
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4566 Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4567 automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4568 particular news group. This can be done by:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4569
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4570 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4571
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4572 Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4573 of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4574 "XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4575 system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4576 for reading and posting).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4577
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4578 CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4579 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4580 Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4581 newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4582 there.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4583
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4584 Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4585 default. Here are some of these default settings:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4586
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4587 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4588 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4589 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4590 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4591 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4592
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4593 When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored;
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4594 the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4595
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4596 ** CC mode changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4597
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4598 *** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4599 code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4600 values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4601 this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4602 Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4603 loaded.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4604
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4605 If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C,
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
4606 Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4607 style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
4608 share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
4609 c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4610 must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4611
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4612 *** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4613 of the current buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4614
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4615 *** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4616 it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4617 of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4618
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4619 *** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4620 style that the Python developers like.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4621
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4622 *** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4623 This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4624 just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4625
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4626 ** VC Changes [new]
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4627
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4628 ** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4629 name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4630 directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4631
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4632 This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4633 master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4634 developers.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4635
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4636 You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4637 RET in a buffer visiting that file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4638
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4639 *** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4640 other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4641 writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4642 calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4643
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4644 *** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4645 version numbers, based on the current state of the file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4646
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4647 ** Calendar changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4648
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4649 A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or subclasses
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4650 of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow you do this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4651 for the year of the selected date, or the following/previous years.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4652
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4653 ** ps-print changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4654
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
4655 There are some new user variables for customizing the page layout.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4656
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4657 *** Paper size, paper orientation, columns
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4658
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4659 The variable `ps-paper-type' determines the size of paper ps-print
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4660 formats for; it should contain one of the symbols:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4661 `a4' `a3' `letter' `legal' `letter-small' `tabloid'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4662 `ledger' `statement' `executive' `a4small' `b4' `b5'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4663 It defaults to `letter'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4664 If you need other sizes, see the variable `ps-page-dimensions-database'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4665
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4666 The variable `ps-landscape-mode' determines the orientation
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
4667 of the printing on the page. nil, the default, means "portrait" mode,
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4668 non-nil means "landscape" mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4669
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4670 The variable `ps-number-of-columns' must be a positive integer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4671 It determines the number of columns both in landscape and portrait mode.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
4672 It defaults to 1.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4673
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4674 *** Horizontal layout
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4675
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4676 The horizontal layout is determined by the variables
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4677 `ps-left-margin', `ps-inter-column', and `ps-right-margin'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4678 All are measured in points.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4679
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4680 *** Vertical layout
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4681
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4682 The vertical layout is determined by the variables
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4683 `ps-bottom-margin', `ps-top-margin', and `ps-header-offset'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4684 All are measured in points.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4685
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4686 *** Headers
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4687
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4688 If the variable `ps-print-header' is nil, no header is printed. Then
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4689 `ps-header-offset' is not relevant and `ps-top-margin' represents the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4690 margin above the text.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4691
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
4692 If the variable `ps-print-header-frame' is non-nil, a gaudy
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4693 framing box is printed around the header.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4694
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4695 The contents of the header are determined by `ps-header-lines',
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4696 `ps-show-n-of-n', `ps-left-header' and `ps-right-header'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4697
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
4698 The height of the header is determined by `ps-header-line-pad',
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
4699 `ps-header-font-family', `ps-header-title-font-size' and
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4700 `ps-header-font-size'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4701
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4702 *** Font managing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4703
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4704 The variable `ps-font-family' determines which font family is to be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4705 used for ordinary text. Its value must be a key symbol in the alist
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4706 `ps-font-info-database'. You can add other font families by adding
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4707 elements to this alist.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4708
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
4709 The variable `ps-font-size' determines the size of the font
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4710 for ordinary text. It defaults to 8.5 points.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4711
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4712 ** hideshow changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4713
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4714 *** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
4715 C++, ; for lisp).
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4716
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4717 *** Support for java-mode added.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4718
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4719 *** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4720 in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4721
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4722 *** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the the comments at
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4723 the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4724 way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4725
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4726 *** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4727 robust and a lot faster.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4728
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
4729 *** A block beginning can span multiple lines.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4730
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4731 *** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4732 to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4733 documentation for more details.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4734
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4735 ** Changes in Enriched mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4736
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4737 *** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4738 filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4739 of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4740 use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4741 the next time unless the fill-column is different.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4742
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4743 *** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4744 distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4745 as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4746 as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4747
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4748 ** Font Lock mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4749
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4750 *** Custom support
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4751
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4752 The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4753 font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4754 faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4755 group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4756 your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4757 consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4758
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4759 You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4760
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4761 *** Maximum decoration
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4762
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4763 Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4764 default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4765 of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4766 supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4767 to get the old behavior.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4768
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4769 *** New support
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4770
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4771 Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4772
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4773 Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4774 support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4775
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4776 *** Configurable support
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4777
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4778 Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4779 additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4780 c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4781 java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4782 list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4783 of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4784 convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4785
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4786 Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4787 way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4788 it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4789
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4790 *** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4791
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4792 You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4793 highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4794 for any mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4795
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4796 For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4797
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4798 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t)))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4799
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4800 in your ~/.emacs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4801
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4802 *** New faces
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4803
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4804 Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4805 font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4806 distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4807 to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4808
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4809 *** Changes to fast-lock support mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4810
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4811 The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4812 cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4813 same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4814
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4815 *** Changes to lazy-lock support mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4816
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4817 The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4818 according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4819 the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4820 non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4821 refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4822 the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4823 Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4824
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4825 This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4826 For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4827 this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4828 refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4829 containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4830 the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4831
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4832 As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4833
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4834 Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4835 Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4836 Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4837 new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4838
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4839 If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4840 settings.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4841
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4842 ** Ada mode changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4843
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4844 *** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4845 If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4846 procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4847 you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4848 stubs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4849
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4850 *** There are two new commands:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4851 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4852 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4854 The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options',
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4855 `ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
4856 `ada-compile-options' are used within these commands.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4857
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4858 *** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4859 is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4860 Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4861
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4862 *** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4863 formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4864 places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4865 space between a comma and the beginning of a word.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4866
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4867 ** Scheme mode changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4868
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4869 *** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4870 mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4871 for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4872 with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4873 have any effect.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4874
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4875 If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4876 still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4877 scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4878 variables as buffer-local variables.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4879
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4880 *** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4881 Use M-x dsssl-mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4882
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4883 ** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4884 it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4885 buffer in Emacs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4886
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4887 ** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4888 constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4889 (in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4890
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4891 ** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4892 which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4893 the current defun.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4894
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4895 ** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4896 following arguments are treated as ordinary file names.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4897
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4898 ** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4899 and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4900 necessary).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4901
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4902 ** When you kill a buffer that visits a file,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4903 if there are any registers that save positions in the file,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4904 these register values no longer become completely useless.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4905 If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4906 asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4907 it visits the file and then goes to the same position.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4908
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4909 ** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4910 example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4911 be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4912 you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4913
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4914 You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4915 variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4916 file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4917 revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4918 only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4919
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4920 ** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4921 since it applies only to the current frame.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4922
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4923 ** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4924 file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4925 and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4926
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4927 This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4928 multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4929 variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4930 tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4931 instead of just the file you are editing.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4932
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4933 ** RefTeX mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4934
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4935 RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4936 and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4937 different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4938 multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4939 turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4940
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
4941 C-c ( reftex-label
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4942 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4943 knows which kind of label is needed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4944
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4945 C-c ) reftex-reference
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4946 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4947 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4948
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4949 C-c [ reftex-citation
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4950 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4951 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4952
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4953 C-c & reftex-view-crossref
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4954 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4955
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4956 C-c = reftex-toc
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4957 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4958 can quickly jump to every section.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
4959
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4960 Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4961 commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4962 Full documentation and customization examples are in the file
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4963 reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4964 C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4965
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4966 ** Changes in BibTeX mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4967
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4968 *** Info documentation is now available.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4969
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4970 *** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4971 both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4972
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4973 *** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4974 bibtex-user-optional-fields.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4975
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4976 *** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4977 (use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4978
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4979 *** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4980 entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4981 appropriate functions.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4982
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4983 *** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4984 entries. They are bound by default to M-C-l and M-C-h.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4985
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4986 *** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4987 been cleaned.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4988
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4989 *** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4990 bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4991
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4992 *** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4993 shall be delimited.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4994
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4995 *** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4996 bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4997 bibtex-include-OPTkey for details.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4998
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4999 *** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5000 field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5001 prefixed with `ALT'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5002
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5003 *** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5004 bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5005 formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5006 documentation).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5007
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5008 *** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5009 documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5010 for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5011
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5012 *** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5013 comma should be inserted at end of last field.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5014
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5015 *** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5016 alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5017 signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5018
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5019 *** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5020
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5021 *** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5022
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5023 *** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5024 from alien sources.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5025
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5026 *** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5027 to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5028 crossref entries.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5029
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5030 *** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5031 region.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5032
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5033 *** Added support for imenu.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5034
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5035 *** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5036 of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5037 `compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5038 `next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5039
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5040 *** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5041 from `bibtex-string-files' are searched.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5042
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5043 ** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5044
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5045 ** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5046 functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5047 Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5048 as an argument.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5049
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5050 When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5051 and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5052
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5053 ** browse-url changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5054
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5055 *** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm),
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5056 Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5057 (browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5058 non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5059 customization variables.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5060
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5061 *** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5062
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5063 *** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5064 lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5065 (e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5066
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5067 ** Changes in Ediff
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5068
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5069 *** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5070 pops up the Info file for this command.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5071
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5072 *** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5073 the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5074 merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5075 directories).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5076
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5077 *** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5078 and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5079 files in the same directory.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5080
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5081 *** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5082 The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5083 related to the GNU format has now been fixed.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5084
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5085 ** Changes in Viper
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5086
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5087 *** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
5088 *** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper-
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5089 instead of vip-.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5090 *** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
5091 *** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5092 Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5093 *** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5094 *** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5095 *** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5096 color when Viper is in insert state.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5097 *** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5098 Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5099 viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5100
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5101 ** Etags changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5102
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5103 *** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5104 default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5105 Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5106 variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5107 not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5108
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5109 *** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5110
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5111 *** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements"
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5112 constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5113
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5114 *** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5115 recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5116 In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5117
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5118 *** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5119 C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5120 recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5121 methods and protocols.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5122
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5123 *** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5124 .cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5125 column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5126 paragraph name.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5127
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5128 *** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5129 an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5130 at least M times and as many as N times.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5131
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5132 ** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5133 in files has changed slightly.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5134
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5135 With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5136 time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5137 This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5138 with old time-stamp-format values.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5139
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5140 In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5141 (`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5142 This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5143 reasons.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5144
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5145 In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5146 natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5147 fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5148 (`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5149 time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5150 specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d".
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5151
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5152 Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5153 case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5154 truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5155
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5156 The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5157 being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5158 future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5159 recommended now will continue to work then.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5160
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5161 See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5162 details.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5163
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5164 ** There are some additional major modes:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5165
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5166 dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5167 m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5168 meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5169
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5170 ** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5171 copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5172 into Emacs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5173
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5174 ** New Lisp packages include:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5175
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5176 *** battery.el displays battery status for laptops.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5177
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5178 *** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5179 be used for adding some indecent words to your email.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5180
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5181 *** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5182
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5183 *** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5184 in shell buffers.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5185
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5186 *** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5187 See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5188 and `elint-defun'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5189
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5190 *** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5191 meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5192 ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5193 strings or comments.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5194
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5195 These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5196 abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5197 you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5198 insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5199 at these points.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5200
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5201 *** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5202 can visit them by short forms of their names.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5203
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5204 *** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5205 Emacs Lisp function at point.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5206
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5207 *** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5208
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5209 *** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5210 switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5211
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5212 *** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5213
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5214 *** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5215
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5216 *** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5217
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5218 *** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5219 from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5220
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5221 *** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5222 You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5223 inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5224 original place after inserting the copy.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5225
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5226 *** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5227 on the buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5228
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5229 You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5230 velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5231 (with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5232
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5233 Enable mouse-drag with:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5234 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5235 -or-
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5236 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5237
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5238 *** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5239 mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5240
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5241 *** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5242 It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5243
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5244 *** ogonek
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5245
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5246 The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5247 Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5248 platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5249 TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5250 ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5251 prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5252 instance) and vice versa.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5253
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5254 To use this package load it using
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5255 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5256 Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
5257 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5258 M-x ogonek-how -- in English
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5259 The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5260 ways of customization in `.emacs'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5261
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5262 *** Interface to ph.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5263
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5264 Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5265
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5266 The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5267 services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5268 these servers.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5269
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5270 *** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5271
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5272 *** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5273 You can move the virtual cursor with special commands
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5274 while the real cursor does not move.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5275
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5276 *** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5277 for visiting your favorite web sites.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5278
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5279 *** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5280 so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5281
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5282 ** movemail change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5283
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5284 Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5285 mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5286 supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5287 user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5288
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5289 This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5290
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5291 * Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5292
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5293 ** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5294
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5295 Emacs handles three different conventions for representing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5296 end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5297 Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5298 file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5299 file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5300
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5301 To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5302 C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5303 coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5304 specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5305 LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5306 save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5307
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5308 * Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5309
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5310 ** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5311 Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5312 vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5313 Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5314
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5315 ** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5316 to start with w32- instead of win32-.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5317
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5318 In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5319 don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5320 "win".
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5321
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5322 ** Basic Lisp changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5323
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5324 *** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5325 evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5326
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5327 *** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5328 be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5329 or by the user.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5330
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5331 The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5332
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5333 *** There are new macros `when' and `unless'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5334
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5335 (when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5336 (unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5337
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5338 *** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5339 usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5340 its argument.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5341
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5342 *** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5343
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5344 *** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5345
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5346 *** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5347
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5348 *** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5349 error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5350 include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5351 `format' function.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5352
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5353 *** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5354 or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5355 whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5356
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5357 *** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5358 either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5359 adding one of these suffixes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5360
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5361 *** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5362 which specifies the base to use when converting an integer.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
5363 If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5364
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5365 We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5366 because that would be much more work and does not seem useful.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5367
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5368 *** substring now handles vectors as well as strings.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5369
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5370 *** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5371 You must load the `cl' library to define it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5372
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5373 *** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5374 conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5375
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5376 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5377
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5378 BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5379 BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5380
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5381 *** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5382 choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5383 restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5384 works using `save-current-buffer'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5385
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5386 *** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5387 write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5388 of the last form.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5389
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5390 *** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5391 which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5392 last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5393 as the last form.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5394
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5395 *** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5396 characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5397 matches.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5398
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5399 For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose").
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5400
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5401 *** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5402 with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5403 Then it returns that string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5404
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5405 For example, if the current buffer name is `foo',
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5406
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5407 (with-output-to-string
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5408 (princ "The buffer is ")
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5409 (princ (buffer-name)))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5410
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5411 returns "The buffer is foo".
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5412
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5413 ** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5414 is non-nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5415
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5416 These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5417 buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5418 characters that occupy several buffer positions each.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5419
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5420 *** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5421 a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5422
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5423 Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements;
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5424 character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5425 Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5426 position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5427 characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5428 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5429
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5430 ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5431 Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5432 non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5433 characters".
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5434
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5435 The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5436 through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5437 "leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5438 range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5439 leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5440
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5441 *** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5442 (forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5443 multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5444 character, which may be more than one buffer position.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5445
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5446 This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5447 always one buffer position, need to be changed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5448
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5449 However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
5450
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5451 *** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5452 because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5453 have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5454 the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5455 guaranteed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5456
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5457 *** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5458 between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5459 character).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5460
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5461 When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5462
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5463 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5464 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5465 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5466 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5467 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5468
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5469 *** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5470
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5471 *** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5472 `length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5473 more than the number of characters.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5474
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5475 You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5476 it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5477 \xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5478 is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5479 follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5480 newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5481
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5482 *** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5483 and returns a string containing those characters.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5484
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5485 *** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5486 (sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5487 counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5488 character, sref signals an error.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5489
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5490 *** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5491 in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5492 string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5493
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5494 *** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5495 in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5496 region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5497
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5498 *** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5499 the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5500 to a vector of the characters in it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5501
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5502 *** The function store-substring alters part of the contents
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5503 of a string. You call it as follows:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5504
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5505 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5506
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5507 This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5508 STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5509 This function really does alter the contents of STRING.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5510 Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5511 it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5512
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5513 *** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5514 if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5515
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5516 *** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5517 if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5518
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5519 *** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5520 to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5521 not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5522 which contains all or just part of the existing string.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5523
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5524 (truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5525
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5526 This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5527
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5528 The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5529 If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5530 are not included in the resulting value.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5531
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5532 The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5533 at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5534 WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5535 is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5536
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5537 If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5538 place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5539 character extends across that column), then the padding character
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5540 PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5541 string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5542 column START-COLUMN.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5543
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5544 *** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5545 the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5546 necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5547 difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5548 changed text, before the change.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5549
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5550 *** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5551 sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5552 one character set for each script, not for each language.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5553
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5554 **** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5555
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5556 **** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5557
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5558 **** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5559 set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5560
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5561 **** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5562 name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5563 which identify the character within that character set.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5564
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5565 **** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5566 byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5567 opposite of split-char.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5568
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5569 **** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5570 of all the characters between BEG and END.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5571
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5572 **** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5573 of all the characters in a string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5574
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5575 *** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5576 and specifying coding systems.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5577
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5578 **** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5579 system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5580 of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5581 (Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5582 and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5583 as what to do about code conversion.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5584
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5585 **** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5586 name. It returns t if so, nil if not.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5587
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5588 **** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5589 for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5590 except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5591
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5592 Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5593 which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5594 to match against a file name.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5595
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5596 VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5597 a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5598 decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5599 to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5600 systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5601 specifies the coding system for encoding.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5602
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5603 If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5604 or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5605
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5606 **** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5607 the coding system to use for network sockets.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5608
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5609 Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5610 which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5611 either a port number or a regular expression matching some network
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5612 service names.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5613
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5614 VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5615 a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5616 decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5617 to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5618 systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5619 specifies the coding system for encoding.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5620
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5621 If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5622 or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5623
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5624 **** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5625 for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5626 except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5627 start the subprocess.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5628
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5629 **** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5630 systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5631 when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5632 (OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5633 to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5634
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5635 **** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5636 coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5637 subprocess.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5638
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5639 It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5640 but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5641 start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5642 connection permanently or until overridden.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5643
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5644 The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5645 file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5646 network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5647 coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5648 It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5649 system for one operation at a time.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5650
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5651 **** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5652 files, subprocesses or network connections.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5653
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5654 **** The function process-coding-system tells you what
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5655 coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5656 The value is a cons cell,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5657 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5658 where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5659 the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5660 input to the subprocess.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5661
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5662 **** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5663 change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5664
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5665 ** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5666 customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5667 you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5668
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5669 You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5670 variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5671 information (usually): the "type" which says what values are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5672 legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5673 customization.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5674
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5675 Thus, instead of writing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5676
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5677 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5678 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.")
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5679
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5680 you would now write this:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5681
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5682 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5683 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely."
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5684 :type 'boolean
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5685 :group foo)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5686
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5687 The type `boolean' means that this variable has only
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5688 two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5689 describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5690 for a description of them.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5691
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5692 The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5693 should belong to. You define a new group like this:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5694
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5695 (defgroup ispell nil
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5696 "Spell checking using Ispell."
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5697 :group 'processes)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5698
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5699 The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5700 group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5701 but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5702 to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5703 second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5704
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5705 Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5706 package should have just one group; a more complex package should
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5707 have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5708 package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword"
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5709 first-level subgroups.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5710
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5711 ** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5712
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5713 This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5714 separate manual that accompanies Emacs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5715
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5716 ** easy-mmode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5717
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5718 The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5719 developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5720 only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5721 predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5722 `easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5723 `easy-mmode-define-keymap'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5724
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5725 ** Text property changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5726
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5727 *** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5728 text property.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5729
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5730 *** The new functions next-char-property-change and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5731 previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5732 place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5733 functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5734 starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5735
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5736 If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5737 LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5738 of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5739 position of the beginning or end of the buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5740
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5741 *** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5742 value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5743 is an alternative to using the keymap itself.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5744
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5745 ** Changes in invisibility features
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5746
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5747 *** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5748 hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5749 is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5750 should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5751 would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5752 make the overlay visible.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5753
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5754 During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5755 invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5756 needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5757 which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5758 the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5759 t when it should hide it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5760
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5761 *** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5762
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5763 Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
5764 invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol)
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
5765 and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5766 Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
5767 manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5768 Here is an example of how to do this:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5769
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5770 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis:
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
5771 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5772 ;; If you don't want ellipsis:
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
5773 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5774
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5775 ...
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5776 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5777
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5778 ...
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5779 ;; When done with the overlays:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5780 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5781 ;; Or respectively:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5782 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5783
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5784 ** Changes in syntax parsing.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5785
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5786 *** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5787 `parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5788 obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5789 `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5790
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5791 If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5792 is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5793 used to determine the syntax of the character at the position.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5794
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5795 When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5796 character in the buffer is calculated thus:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5797
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5798 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5799 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type;
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5800
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5801 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5802 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e.,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5803 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5804
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5805 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5806 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5807 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5808 determine the syntax type of the character.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5809
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5810 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5811 of the current buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5812
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5813 *** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5814 value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5815 for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5816
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5817 *** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5818 and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5819 only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5820 character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5821 another character with the same code (unless quoted).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5822
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5823 These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5824 text property.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5825
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5826 *** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5827 arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5828 of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5829
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5830 *** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5831 (and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5832 element: the character address of the start of last comment or string;
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5833 nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5834 string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5835
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5836 *** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5837 syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5838 `font-lock-comment-start-regexp'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5839
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5840 ** Changes in face features
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5841
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5842 *** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5843 if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5844
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5845 *** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5846 of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5847
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5848 *** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5849 set-face-bold-p sets that flag.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5850
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5851 *** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5852 set-face-italic-p sets that flag.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5854 *** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5855 by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5856 and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5857 the `face' property (either the character's text property or an
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5858 overlay property).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5859
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5860 This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5861 arbitrary colors in a Lisp package.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5862
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5863 ** Changes in file-handling functions
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5864
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5865 *** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5866 directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5867 they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5868 is now done only in substitute-in-file-name.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5869
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5870 This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5871 begins with ~.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5872
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5873 *** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5874 it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5875
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5876 *** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5877 the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5878
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5879 *** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5880 as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5881
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5882 *** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5883 character code conversion as well as other things.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5884
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5885 Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5886 (formerly it did not).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5887
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5888 *** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5889 environment variable to decide which directory to put them in.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5890
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5891 *** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5892 instead of constant strings.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5893
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5894 *** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5895 to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5896 any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5897
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5898 substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5899 in the same way as before.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5900
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5901 *** The variable `format-alist' is more general now.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5902 The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5903 which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5904
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5905 *** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5906 error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5907 else, and returns nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5908
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5909 *** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5910 directory cannot be listed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5911
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5912 ** Changes in minibuffer input
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5913
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5914 *** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5915 read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5916 additional argument which specifies the default value. If this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5917 argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5918 ways:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5919
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5920 It is returned if the user enters empty input.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5921 It is available through the history command M-n.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5922
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5923 *** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5924 read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5925 argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5926 minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5927 enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5928
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5929 In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5930 argument in this way.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5931
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5932 *** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5933 from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5934 minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5935
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5936 ** Echo area features
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5937
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5938 *** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5939 echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5940 minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5941 after the echo area is cleared.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5942
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5943 *** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5944 in the echo area, or nil if there is none.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5945
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5946 ** Keyboard input features
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5947
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5948 *** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5949 set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5950
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5951 *** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5952 received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5953 by keyboard macros.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5954
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5955 ** Frame-related changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5956
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5957 *** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5958 creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5959 hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5960
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5961 *** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5962 the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5963 has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5964
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5965 *** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5966 selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5967 value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5968 in the selected frame.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5969
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5970 *** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5971 is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5972 which side of the window to put the scroll bars on.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5973
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5974 ** X Windows features
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5975
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5976 *** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5977 x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5978 x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5979
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5980 *** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5981 The menu displays the current status of the box or button.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5982
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5983 *** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5984 MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5985 A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5986
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5987 If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5988 it is good to supply 1 for this argument.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5989
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5990 ** Subprocess features
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5991
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5992 *** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5993 functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5994 automatically.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5995
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5996 *** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5997 and returns the output from the command as a string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5998
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5999 *** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6000 and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6001
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6002 ** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6003 does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6004
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6005 ** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6006 at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6007 goes after the other menu items.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6008
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6009 ** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
6010 of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6011 around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6012 are in use.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6013
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6014 The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6015 series of several changes--if that seems safe.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6016
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6017 Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6018 after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6019 form.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6020
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6021 ** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6022 is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6023 but its hook is still run.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6024
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6025 ** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6026 for errors that are handled by condition-case.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6027
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6028 If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6029 regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6030 useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6031
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6032 This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6033 are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6034 filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6035 warned.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6036
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6037 ** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6038 way for Emacs to "ring the bell".
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6039
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6040 ** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6041 integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6042 functions like display-time.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6043
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6044 ** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6045 name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6046
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6047 ** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6048 can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6049 is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6050
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6051 ** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6052 if there is an error in compilation.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6053
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6054 ** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6055 switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6056 argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6057 they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6058
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6059 ** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6060 Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6061 the *scratch* buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6062
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6063 ** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6064 The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6065 where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6066 e.g., in Font Lock mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6067
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6068 ** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6069 and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6070 It starts at 0 when the buffer is created.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6071
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6072 ** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6073 using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6074 variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6075 and compose-mail-other-frame.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6076
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6077 ** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6078 can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6079 full name of the specified user will be returned.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6080
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6081 ** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6082 of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6083 where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6084 in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6085 option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6086 files at all.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6087
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6088 ** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6089 and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6090 width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6091 the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6092
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6093 For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6094 minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6095 with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6096 is how %S normally pads to two positions.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6097
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6098 ** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6099
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6100 ** imenu.el changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6101
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6102 You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
6103 item from menu created by imenu.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6104
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6105 An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6106 #include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6107 select one of those items.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6108
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6109 * Emacs 19.34 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6110
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6111 * Changes in Emacs 19.33.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6112
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6113 ** Bibtex mode no longer turns on Auto Fill automatically. (No major
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6114 mode should do that--it is the user's choice.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6115
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6116 ** The variable normal-auto-fill-function specifies the function to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6117 use for auto-fill-function, if and when Auto Fill is turned on.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6118 Major modes can set this locally to alter how Auto Fill works.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6119
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6120 * Editing Changes in Emacs 19.32
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6121
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6122 ** C-x f with no argument now signals an error.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6123 To set the fill column at the current column, use C-u C-x f.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6124
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6125 ** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6126 conversion. If you type the abbreviation with mixed case, and it
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6127 matches the beginning of the expansion including case, then the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6128 expansion is copied verbatim. Using SPC M-/ to copy an additional
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6129 word always copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6130 all caps.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6131
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6132 ** On a non-windowing terminal, which can display only one Emacs frame
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6133 at a time, creating a new frame with C-x 5 2 also selects that frame.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6134
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6135 When using a display that can show multiple frames at once, C-x 5 2
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6136 does make the frame visible, but does not select it. This is the same
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6137 as in previous Emacs versions.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6138
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6139 ** You can use C-x 5 2 to create multiple frames on MSDOS, just as on a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6140 non-X terminal on Unix. Of course, only one frame is visible at any
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6141 time, since your terminal doesn't have the ability to display multiple
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6142 frames.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6143
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6144 ** On Windows, set win32-pass-alt-to-system to a non-nil value
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6145 if you would like tapping the Alt key to invoke the Windows menu.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6146 This feature is not enabled by default; since the Alt key is also the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6147 Meta key, it is too easy and painful to activate this feature by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6148 accident.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6149
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6150 ** The command apply-macro-to-region-lines repeats the last defined
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6151 keyboard macro once for each complete line within the current region.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6152 It does this line by line, by moving point to the beginning of that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6153 line and then executing the macro.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6154
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6155 This command is not new, but was never documented before.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6156
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6157 ** You can now use Mouse-1 to place the region around a string constant
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6158 (something surrounded by doublequote characters or other delimiter
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6159 characters of like syntax) by double-clicking on one of the delimiting
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6160 characters.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6161
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6162 ** Font Lock mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6163
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6164 *** Font Lock support modes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6165
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6166 Font Lock can be configured to use Fast Lock mode and Lazy Lock mode (see
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6167 below) in a flexible way. Rather than adding the appropriate function to the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6168 hook font-lock-mode-hook, you can use the new variable font-lock-support-mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6169 to control which modes have Fast Lock mode or Lazy Lock mode turned on when
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6170 Font Lock mode is enabled.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6171
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6172 For example, to use Fast Lock mode when Font Lock mode is turned on, put:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6173
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6174 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'fast-lock-mode)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6175
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6176 in your ~/.emacs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6177
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6178 *** lazy-lock
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6179
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6180 The lazy-lock package speeds up Font Lock mode by making fontification occur
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6181 only when necessary, such as when a previously unfontified part of the buffer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6182 becomes visible in a window. When you create a buffer with Font Lock mode and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6183 Lazy Lock mode turned on, the buffer is not fontified. When certain events
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6184 occur (such as scrolling), Lazy Lock makes sure that the visible parts of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6185 buffer are fontified. Lazy Lock also defers on-the-fly fontification until
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6186 Emacs has been idle for a given amount of time.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6187
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6188 To use this package, put in your ~/.emacs:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6189
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6190 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'lazy-lock-mode)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6191
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6192 To control the package behaviour, see the documentation for `lazy-lock-mode'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6193
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6194 ** Changes in BibTeX mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6195
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6196 *** For all entries allow spaces and tabs between opening brace or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6197 paren and key.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6198
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6199 *** Non-escaped double-quoted characters (as in `Sch"of') are now
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6200 supported.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6201
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6202 ** Gnus changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6203
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6204 Gnus, the Emacs news reader, has undergone further rewriting. Many new
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6205 commands and variables have been added. There should be no
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6206 significant incompatibilities between this Gnus version and the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6207 previously released version, except in the message composition area.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6208
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6209 Below is a list of the more user-visible changes. Coding changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6210 between Gnus 5.1 and 5.2 are more extensive.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6211
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
6212 *** A new message composition mode is used. All old customization
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6213 variables for mail-mode, rnews-reply-mode and gnus-msg are now
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6214 obsolete.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6215
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6216 *** Gnus is now able to generate "sparse" threads -- threads where
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6217 missing articles are represented by empty nodes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6218
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6219 (setq gnus-build-sparse-threads 'some)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6220
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6221 *** Outgoing articles are stored on a special archive server.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6222
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6223 To disable this: (setq gnus-message-archive-group nil)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6224
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6225 *** Partial thread regeneration now happens when articles are
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
6226 referred.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6227
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6228 *** Gnus can make use of GroupLens predictions:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6229
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6230 (setq gnus-use-grouplens t)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6231
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6232 *** A trn-line tree buffer can be displayed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6233
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6234 (setq gnus-use-trees t)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6235
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6236 *** An nn-like pick-and-read minor mode is available for the summary
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
6237 buffers.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6238
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6239 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-mode-hook 'gnus-pick-mode)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6240
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6241 *** In binary groups you can use a special binary minor mode:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6242
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6243 `M-x gnus-binary-mode'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6244
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6245 *** Groups can be grouped in a folding topic hierarchy.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6246
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6247 (add-hook 'gnus-group-mode-hook 'gnus-topic-mode)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6248
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6249 *** Gnus can re-send and bounce mail.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6250
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6251 Use the `S D r' and `S D b'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6252
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6253 *** Groups can now have a score, and bubbling based on entry frequency
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6254 is possible.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6255
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6256 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-exit-hook 'gnus-summary-bubble-group)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6257
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6258 *** Groups can be process-marked, and commands can be performed on
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6259 groups of groups.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6260
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6261 *** Caching is possible in virtual groups.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6262
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6263 *** nndoc now understands all kinds of digests, mail boxes, rnews news
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
6264 batches, ClariNet briefs collections, and just about everything else.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6265
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6266 *** Gnus has a new backend (nnsoup) to create/read SOUP packets.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6267
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6268 *** The Gnus cache is much faster.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6269
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6270 *** Groups can be sorted according to many criteria.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6271
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6272 For instance: (setq gnus-group-sort-function 'gnus-group-sort-by-rank)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6273
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6274 *** New group parameters have been introduced to set list-address and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6275 expiration times.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6276
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6277 *** All formatting specs allow specifying faces to be used.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6278
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6279 *** There are several more commands for setting/removing/acting on
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6280 process marked articles on the `M P' submap.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6281
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6282 *** The summary buffer can be limited to show parts of the available
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6283 articles based on a wide range of criteria. These commands have been
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6284 bound to keys on the `/' submap.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6285
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6286 *** Articles can be made persistent -- as an alternative to saving
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6287 articles with the `*' command.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6288
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6289 *** All functions for hiding article elements are now toggles.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6290
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6291 *** Article headers can be buttonized.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6292
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6293 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-add-buttons-to-head)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6294
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6295 *** All mail backends support fetching articles by Message-ID.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6296
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
6297 *** Duplicate mail can now be treated properly. See the
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6298 `nnmail-treat-duplicates' variable.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6299
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6300 *** All summary mode commands are available directly from the article
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
6301 buffer.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6302
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6303 *** Frames can be part of `gnus-buffer-configuration'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6304
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6305 *** Mail can be re-scanned by a daemonic process.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6306
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6307 *** Gnus can make use of NoCeM files to filter spam.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6308
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6309 (setq gnus-use-nocem t)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6310
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
6311 *** Groups can be made permanently visible.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6312
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6313 (setq gnus-permanently-visible-groups "^nnml:")
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6314
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
6315 *** Many new hooks have been introduced to make customizing easier.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6316
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6317 *** Gnus respects the Mail-Copies-To header.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6318
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
6319 *** Threads can be gathered by looking at the References header.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
6320
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
6321 (setq gnus-summary-thread-gathering-function
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6322 'gnus-gather-threads-by-references)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6323
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6324 *** Read articles can be stored in a special backlog buffer to avoid
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
6325 refetching.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6326
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6327 (setq gnus-keep-backlog 50)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6328
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6329 *** A clean copy of the current article is always stored in a separate
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6330 buffer to allow easier treatment.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6331
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6332 *** Gnus can suggest where to save articles. See `gnus-split-methods'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6333
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6334 *** Gnus doesn't have to do as much prompting when saving.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6335
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6336 (setq gnus-prompt-before-saving t)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6337
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6338 *** gnus-uu can view decoded files asynchronously while fetching
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
6339 articles.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6340
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6341 (setq gnus-uu-grabbed-file-functions 'gnus-uu-grab-view)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6342
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
6343 *** Filling in the article buffer now works properly on cited text.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6344
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6345 *** Hiding cited text adds buttons to toggle hiding, and how much
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6346 cited text to hide is now customizable.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6347
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6348 (setq gnus-cited-lines-visible 2)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6349
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6350 *** Boring headers can be hidden.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6351
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6352 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-hide-boring-headers)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6353
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6354 *** Default scoring values can now be set from the menu bar.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6355
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6356 *** Further syntax checking of outgoing articles have been added.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6357
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6358 The Gnus manual has been expanded. It explains all these new features
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6359 in greater detail.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6360
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6361 * Lisp Changes in Emacs 19.32
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6362
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6363 ** The function set-visited-file-name now accepts an optional
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6364 second argument NO-QUERY. If it is non-nil, then the user is not
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6365 asked for confirmation in the case where the specified file already
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6366 exists.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6367
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6368 ** The variable print-length applies to printing vectors and bitvectors,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6369 as well as lists.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6370
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6371 ** The new function keymap-parent returns the parent keymap
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6372 of a given keymap.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6373
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6374 ** The new function set-keymap-parent specifies a new parent for a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6375 given keymap. The arguments are KEYMAP and PARENT. PARENT must be a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6376 keymap or nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6377
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6378 ** Sometimes menu keymaps use a command name, a symbol, which is really
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6379 an automatically generated alias for some other command, the "real"
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6380 name. In such a case, you should give that alias symbol a non-nil
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6381 menu-alias property. That property tells the menu system to look for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6382 equivalent keys for the real name instead of equivalent keys for the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6383 alias.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6384
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6385 * Editing Changes in Emacs 19.31
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6386
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6387 ** Freedom of the press restricted in the United States.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6388
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6389 Emacs has been censored in accord with the Communications Decency Act.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6390 This includes removing some features of the doctor program. That law
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6391 was described by its supporters as a ban on pornography, but it bans
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6392 far more than that. The Emacs distribution has never contained any
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6393 pornography, but parts of it were nonetheless prohibited.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6394
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6395 For information on US government censorship of the Internet, and what
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6396 you can do to bring back freedom of the press, see the web site
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6397 `http://www.vtw.org/'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6398
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6399 ** A note about C mode indentation customization.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6400
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6401 The old (Emacs 19.29) ways of specifying a C indentation style
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6402 do not normally work in the new implementation of C mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6403 It has its own methods of customizing indentation, which are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6404 much more powerful than the old C mode. See the Editing Programs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6405 chapter of the manual for details.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6406
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6407 However, you can load the library cc-compat to make the old
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6408 customization variables take effect.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6409
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6410 ** Marking with the mouse.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6411
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6412 When you mark a region with the mouse, the region now remains
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6413 highlighted until the next input event, regardless of whether you are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6414 using M-x transient-mark-mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6415
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6416 ** Improved Windows NT/95 support.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6417
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6418 *** Emacs now supports scroll bars on Windows NT and Windows 95.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6419
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6420 *** Emacs now supports subprocesses on Windows 95. (Subprocesses used
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6421 to work on NT only and not on 95.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6422
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6423 *** There are difficulties with subprocesses, though, due to problems
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6424 in Windows, beyond the control of Emacs. They work fine as long as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6425 you run Windows applications. The problems arise when you run a DOS
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6426 application in a subprocesses. Since current shells run as DOS
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6427 applications, these problems are significant.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6428
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6429 If you run a DOS application in a subprocess, then the application is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6430 likely to busy-wait, which means that your machine will be 100% busy.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6431 However, if you don't mind the temporary heavy load, the subprocess
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6432 will work OK as long as you tell it to terminate before you start any
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6433 other DOS application as a subprocess.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6434
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6435 Emacs is unable to terminate or interrupt a DOS subprocess.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6436 You have to do this by providing input directly to the subprocess.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6437
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6438 If you run two DOS applications at the same time in two separate
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6439 subprocesses, even if one of them is asynchronous, you will probably
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6440 have to reboot your machine--until then, it will remain 100% busy.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6441 Windows simply does not cope when one Windows process tries to run two
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6442 separate DOS subprocesses. Typing CTL-ALT-DEL and then choosing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6443 Shutdown seems to work although it may take a few minutes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6444
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6445 ** M-x resize-minibuffer-mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6446
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6447 This command, not previously mentioned in NEWS, toggles a mode in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6448 which the minibuffer window expands to show as many lines as the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6449 minibuffer contains.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6450
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6451 ** `title' frame parameter and resource.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6452
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6453 The `title' X resource now specifies just the frame title, nothing else.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6454 It does not affect the name used for looking up other X resources.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6455 It works by setting the new `title' frame parameter, which likewise
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6456 affects just the displayed title of the frame.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6457
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6458 The `name' parameter continues to do what it used to do:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6459 it specifies the frame name for looking up X resources,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6460 and also serves as the default for the displayed title
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6461 when the `title' parameter is unspecified or nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6462
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6463 ** Emacs now uses the X toolkit by default, if you have a new
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6464 enough version of X installed (X11R5 or newer).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6465
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6466 ** When you compile Emacs with the Motif widget set, Motif handles the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6467 F10 key by activating the menu bar. To avoid confusion, the usual
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6468 Emacs binding of F10 is replaced with a no-op when using Motif.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6469
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6470 If you want to be able to use F10 in Emacs, you can rebind the Motif
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6471 menubar to some other key which you don't use. To do so, add
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6472 something like this to your X resources file. This example rebinds
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6473 the Motif menu bar activation key to S-F12:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6474
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6475 Emacs*defaultVirtualBindings: osfMenuBar : Shift<Key>F12
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6476
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6477 ** In overwrite mode, DEL now inserts spaces in most cases
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6478 to replace the characters it "deletes".
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6479
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6480 ** The Rmail summary now shows the number of lines in each message.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6481
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6482 ** Rmail has a new command M-x unforward-rmail-message, which extracts
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6483 a forwarded message from the message that forwarded it. To use it,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6484 select a message which contains a forwarded message and then type the command.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6485 It inserts the forwarded message as a separate Rmail message
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6486 immediately after the selected one.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6487
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6488 This command also undoes the textual modifications that are standardly
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6489 made, as part of forwarding, by Rmail and other mail reader programs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6490
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6491 ** Turning off saving of .saves-... files in your home directory.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6492
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6493 Each Emacs session writes a file named .saves-... in your home
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6494 directory to record which files M-x recover-session should recover.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6495 If you exit Emacs normally with C-x C-c, it deletes that file. If
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6496 Emacs or the operating system crashes, the file remains for M-x
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6497 recover-session.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6498
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6499 You can turn off the writing of these files by setting
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6500 auto-save-list-file-name to nil. If you do this, M-x recover-session
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6501 will not work.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6502
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6503 Some previous Emacs versions failed to delete these files even on
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6504 normal exit. This is fixed now. If you are thinking of turning off
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6505 this feature because of past experiences with versions that had this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6506 bug, it would make sense to check whether you still want to do so
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6507 now that the bug is fixed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6508
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6509 ** Changes to Version Control (VC)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6510
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6511 There is a new variable, vc-follow-symlinks. It indicates what to do
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6512 when you visit a link to a file that is under version control.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6513 Editing the file through the link bypasses the version control system,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6514 which is dangerous and probably not what you want.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6515
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6516 If this variable is t, VC follows the link and visits the real file,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6517 telling you about it in the echo area. If it is `ask' (the default),
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6518 VC asks for confirmation whether it should follow the link. If nil,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6519 the link is visited and a warning displayed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6520
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6521 ** iso-acc.el now lets you specify a choice of language.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6522 Languages include "latin-1" (the default) and "latin-2" (which
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6523 is designed for entering ISO Latin-2 characters).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6524
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6525 There are also choices for specific human languages such as French and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6526 Portuguese. These are subsets of Latin-1, which differ in that they
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6527 enable only the accent characters needed for particular language.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6528 The other accent characters, not needed for the chosen language,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6529 remain normal.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6530
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6531 ** Posting articles and sending mail now has M-TAB completion on various
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6532 header fields (Newsgroups, To, CC, ...).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6533
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6534 Completion in the Newsgroups header depends on the list of groups
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6535 known to your news reader. Completion in the Followup-To header
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6536 offers those groups which are in the Newsgroups header, since
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6537 Followup-To usually just holds one of those.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6538
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6539 Completion in fields that hold mail addresses works based on the list
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6540 of local users plus your aliases. Additionally, if your site provides
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6541 a mail directory or a specific host to use for any unrecognized user
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6542 name, you can arrange to query that host for completion also. (See the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6543 documentation of variables `mail-directory-process' and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6544 `mail-directory-stream'.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6545
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6546 ** A greatly extended sgml-mode offers new features such as (to be configured)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6547 skeletons with completing read for tags and attributes, typing named
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6548 characters including optionally all 8bit characters, making tags invisible
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6549 with optional alternate display text, skipping and deleting tag(pair)s.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6550
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6551 Note: since Emacs' syntax feature cannot limit the special meaning of ', " and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6552 - to inside <>, for some texts the result, especially of font locking, may be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6553 wrong (see `sgml-specials' if you get wrong results).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6554
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6555 The derived html-mode configures this with tags and attributes more or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6556 less HTML3ish. It also offers optional quick keys like C-c 1 for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6557 headline or C-c u for unordered list (see `html-quick-keys'). Edit /
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6558 Text Properties / Face or M-g combinations create tags as applicable.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6559 Outline minor mode is supported and level 1 font-locking tries to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6560 fontify tag contents (which only works when they fit on one line, due
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6561 to a limitation in font-lock).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6562
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6563 External viewing via browse-url can occur automatically upon saving.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6564
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6565 ** M-x imenu-add-to-menubar now adds to the menu bar for the current
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6566 buffer only. If you want to put an Imenu item in the menu bar for all
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6567 buffers that use a particular major mode, use the mode hook, as in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6568 this example:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6569
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6570 (add-hook 'emacs-lisp-mode-hook
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6571 '(lambda () (imenu-add-to-menubar "Index")))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6572
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6573 ** Changes in BibTeX mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6574
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6575 *** Field names may now contain digits, hyphens, and underscores.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6576
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6577 *** Font Lock mode is now supported.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6578
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6579 *** bibtex-make-optional-field is no longer interactive.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6580
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6581 *** If bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil, inserting new
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6582 entries is now done with a faster algorithm. However, inserting
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6583 will fail in this case if the buffer contains invalid entries or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6584 isn't in sorted order, so you should finish each entry with C-c C-c
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6585 (bibtex-close-entry) after you have inserted or modified it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6586 The default value of bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6587
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6588 *** Function `show-all' is no longer bound to a key, since C-u C-c C-q
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6589 does the same job.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6590
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6591 *** Entries with quotes inside quote-delimited fields (as `author =
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6592 "Stefan Sch{\"o}f"') are now supported.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6593
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6594 *** Case in field names doesn't matter anymore when searching for help
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6595 text.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6596
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6597 ** Font Lock mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6598
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6599 *** Global Font Lock mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6600
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6601 Font Lock mode can be turned on globally, in buffers that support it, by the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6602 new command global-font-lock-mode. You can use the new variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6603 font-lock-global-modes to control which modes have Font Lock mode automagically
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6604 turned on. By default, this variable is set so that Font Lock mode is turned
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6605 on globally where the buffer mode supports it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6606
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6607 For example, to automagically turn on Font Lock mode where supported, put:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6608
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6609 (global-font-lock-mode t)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6610
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6611 in your ~/.emacs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6612
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6613 *** Local Refontification
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6614
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6615 In Font Lock mode, editing a line automatically refontifies that line only.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6616 However, if your change alters the syntactic context for following lines,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6617 those lines remain incorrectly fontified. To refontify them, use the new
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6618 command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6619
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6620 In certain major modes, M-g M-g refontifies the entire current function.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6621 (The variable font-lock-mark-block-function controls how to find the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6622 current function.) In other major modes, M-g M-g refontifies 16 lines
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6623 above and below point.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6624
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6625 With a prefix argument N, M-g M-g refontifies N lines above and below point.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6626
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6627 ** Follow mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6628
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6629 Follow mode is a new minor mode combining windows showing the same
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6630 buffer into one tall "virtual window". The windows are typically two
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6631 side-by-side windows. Follow mode makes them scroll together as if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6632 they were a unit. To use it, go to a frame with just one window,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6633 split it into two side-by-side windows using C-x 3, and then type M-x
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6634 follow-mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6635
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6636 M-x follow-mode turns off Follow mode if it is already enabled.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6637
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6638 To display two side-by-side windows and activate Follow mode, use the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6639 command M-x follow-delete-other-windows-and-split.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6640
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6641 ** hide-show changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6642
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6643 The hooks hs-hide-hooks and hs-show-hooks have been renamed
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6644 to hs-hide-hook and hs-show-hook, to follow the convention for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6645 normal hooks.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6646
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6647 ** Simula mode now has a menu containing the most important commands.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6648 The new command simula-indent-exp is bound to C-M-q.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6649
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6650 ** etags can now handle programs written in Erlang. Files are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6651 recognised by the extensions .erl and .hrl. The tagged lines are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6652 those that begin a function, record, or macro.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6653
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6654 ** MSDOS Changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6655
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6656 *** It is now possible to compile Emacs with the version 2 of DJGPP.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6657 Compilation with DJGPP version 1 also still works.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6658
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6659 *** The documentation of DOS-specific aspects of Emacs was rewritten
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6660 and expanded; see the ``MS-DOS'' node in the on-line docs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6661
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6662 *** Emacs now uses ~ for backup file names, not .bak.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6663
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6664 *** You can simulate mouse-3 on two-button mice by simultaneously
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6665 pressing both mouse buttons.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6666
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6667 *** A number of packages and commands which previously failed or had
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6668 restricted functionality on MS-DOS, now work. The most important ones
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
6669 are:
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6670
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6671 **** Printing (both with `M-x lpr-buffer' and with `ps-print' package)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6672 now works.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6673
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6674 **** `Ediff' works (in a single-frame mode).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6675
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6676 **** `M-x display-time' can be used on MS-DOS (due to the new
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6677 implementation of Emacs timers, see below).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6678
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6679 **** `Dired' supports Unix-style shell wildcards.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6680
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6681 **** The `c-macro-expand' command now works as on other platforms.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6682
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6683 **** `M-x recover-session' works.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6684
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6685 **** `M-x list-colors-display' displays all the available colors.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6686
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6687 **** The `TPU-EDT' package works.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6688
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6689 * Lisp changes in Emacs 19.31.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6690
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6691 ** The function using-unix-filesystems on Windows NT and Windows 95
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6692 tells Emacs to read and write files assuming that they reside on a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6693 remote Unix filesystem. No CR/LF translation is done on any files in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6694 this case. Invoking using-unix-filesystems with t activates this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6695 behavior, and invoking it with any other value deactivates it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6696
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6697 ** Change in system-type and system-configuration values.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6698
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6699 The value of system-type on a Linux-based GNU system is now `lignux',
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6700 not `linux'. This means that some programs which use `system-type'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6701 need to be changed. The value of `system-configuration' will also
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6702 be different.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6703
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6704 It is generally recommended to use `system-configuration' rather
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6705 than `system-type'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6706
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6707 See the file LINUX-GNU in this directory for more about this.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6708
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6709 ** The functions shell-command and dired-call-process
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6710 now run file name handlers for default-directory, if it has them.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6711
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6712 ** Undoing the deletion of text now restores the positions of markers
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6713 that pointed into or next to the deleted text.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6714
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6715 ** Timers created with run-at-time now work internally to Emacs, and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6716 no longer use a separate process. Therefore, they now work more
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6717 reliably and can be used for shorter time delays.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6718
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6719 The new function run-with-timer is a convenient way to set up a timer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6720 to run a specified amount of time after the present. A call looks
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6721 like this:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6722
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6723 (run-with-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6724
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6725 SECS says how many seconds should elapse before the timer happens.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6726 It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the timer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6727 becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments ARGS.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6728
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6729 REPEAT gives the interval for repeating the timer (measured in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6730 seconds). It may be an integer or a floating point number. nil or 0
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6731 means don't repeat at all--call FUNCTION just once.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6732
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6733 *** with-timeout provides an easy way to do something but give
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6734 up if too much time passes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6735
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6736 (with-timeout (SECONDS TIMEOUT-FORMS...) BODY...)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6737
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6738 This executes BODY, but gives up after SECONDS seconds.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6739 If it gives up, it runs the TIMEOUT-FORMS and returns the value
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6740 of the last one of them. Normally it returns the value of the last
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6741 form in BODY.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6742
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6743 *** You can now arrange to call a function whenever Emacs is idle for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6744 a certain length of time. To do this, call run-with-idle-timer. A
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6745 call looks like this:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6746
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6747 (run-with-idle-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6748
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6749 SECS says how many seconds of idleness should elapse before the timer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6750 runs. It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6751 timer becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6752 ARGS.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6753
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6754 Emacs becomes idle whenever it finishes executing a keyboard or mouse
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6755 command. It remains idle until it receives another keyboard or mouse
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6756 command.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6757
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6758 REPEAT, if non-nil, means this timer should be activated again each
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6759 time Emacs becomes idle and remains idle for SECS seconds The timer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6760 does not repeat if Emacs *remains* idle; it runs at most once after
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6761 each time Emacs becomes idle.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6762
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6763 If REPEAT is nil, the timer runs just once, the first time Emacs is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6764 idle for SECS seconds.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6765
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6766 *** post-command-idle-hook is now obsolete; you shouldn't use it at
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6767 all, because it interferes with the idle timer mechanism. If your
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6768 programs use post-command-idle-hook, convert them to use idle timers
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6769 instead.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6770
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6771 *** y-or-n-p-with-timeout lets you ask a question but give up if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6772 there is no answer within a certain time.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6773
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6774 (y-or-n-p-with-timeout PROMPT SECONDS DEFAULT-VALUE)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6775
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6776 asks the question PROMPT (just like y-or-n-p). If the user answers
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6777 within SECONDS seconds, it returns the answer that the user gave.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6778 Otherwise it gives up after SECONDS seconds, and returns DEFAULT-VALUE.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6779
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6780 ** Minor change to `encode-time': you can now pass more than seven
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6781 arguments. If you do that, the first six arguments have the usual
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6782 meaning, the last argument is interpreted as the time zone, and the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6783 arguments in between are ignored.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6784
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6785 This means that it works to use the list returned by `decode-time' as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6786 the list of arguments for `encode-time'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6787
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6788 ** The default value of load-path now includes the directory
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6789 /usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp In addition to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6790 /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp. You can use this new directory for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6791 site-specific Lisp packages that belong with a particular Emacs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6792 version.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6793
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6794 It is not unusual for a Lisp package that works well in one Emacs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6795 version to cause trouble in another. Sometimes packages need updating
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6796 for incompatible changes; sometimes they look at internal data that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6797 has changed; sometimes the package has been installed in Emacs itself
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6798 and the installed version should be used. Whatever the reason for the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6799 problem, this new feature makes it easier to solve.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6800
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6801 ** When your program contains a fixed file name (like .completions or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6802 .abbrev.defs), the file name usually needs to be different on operating
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6803 systems with limited file name syntax.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6804
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6805 Now you can avoid ad-hoc conditionals by using the function
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6806 convert-standard-filename to convert the file name to a proper form
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6807 for each operating system. Here is an example of use, from the file
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6808 completions.el:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6809
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6810 (defvar save-completions-file-name
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6811 (convert-standard-filename "~/.completions")
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6812 "*The filename to save completions to.")
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6813
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6814 This sets the variable save-completions-file-name to a value that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6815 depends on the operating system, because the definition of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6816 convert-standard-filename depends on the operating system. On
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6817 Unix-like systems, it returns the specified file name unchanged. On
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6818 MS-DOS, it adapts the name to fit the limitations of that system.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6819
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6820 ** The interactive spec N now returns the numeric prefix argument
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6821 rather than the raw prefix argument. (It still reads a number using the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6822 minibuffer if there is no prefix argument at all.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6823
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6824 ** When a process is deleted, this no longer disconnects the process
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6825 marker from its buffer position.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6826
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6827 ** The variable garbage-collection-messages now controls whether
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6828 Emacs displays a message at the beginning and end of garbage collection.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6829 The default is nil, meaning there are no messages.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6830
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6831 ** The variable debug-ignored-errors specifies certain kinds of errors
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6832 that should not enter the debugger. Its value is a list of error
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6833 condition symbols and/or regular expressions. If the error has any
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6834 of the condition symbols listed, or if any of the regular expressions
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6835 matches the error message, then that error does not enter the debugger,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6836 regardless of the value of debug-on-error.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6837
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6838 This variable is initialized to match certain common but uninteresting
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6839 errors that happen often during editing.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6840
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6841 ** The new function error-message-string converts an error datum
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6842 into its error message. The error datum is what condition-case
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6843 puts into the variable, to describe the error that happened.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6844
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6845 ** Anything that changes which buffer appears in a given window
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6846 now runs the window-scroll-functions for that window.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6847
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6848 ** The new function get-buffer-window-list returns a list of windows displaying
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6849 a buffer. The function is called with the buffer (a buffer object or a buffer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6850 name) and two optional arguments specifying the minibuffer windows and frames
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6851 to search. Therefore this function takes optional args like next-window etc.,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6852 and not get-buffer-window.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6854 ** buffer-substring now runs the hook buffer-access-fontify-functions,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6855 calling each function with two arguments--the range of the buffer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6856 being accessed. buffer-substring-no-properties does not call them.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6857
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6858 If you use this feature, you should set the variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6859 buffer-access-fontified-property to a non-nil symbol, which is a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6860 property name. Then, if all the characters in the buffer range have a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6861 non-nil value for that property, the buffer-access-fontify-functions
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6862 are not called. When called, these functions should put a non-nil
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6863 property on the text that they fontify, so that they won't get called
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6864 over and over for the same text.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6865
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6866 ** Changes in lisp-mnt.el
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6867
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6868 *** The lisp-mnt package can now recognize file headers that are written
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6869 in the formats used by the `what' command and the RCS `ident' command:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6870
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6871 ;; @(#) HEADER: text
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6872 ;; $HEADER: text $
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6873
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6874 in addition to the normal
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6875
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6876 ;; HEADER: text
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6877
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6878 *** The commands lm-verify and lm-synopsis are now interactive. lm-verify
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6879 checks that the library file has proper sections and headers, and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6880 lm-synopsis extracts first line "synopsis'"information.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6881
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6882 * For older news, see the file ONEWS.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6883
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6884 ----------------------------------------------------------------------
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6885 Copyright information:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6886
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6887 Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6888
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6889 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6890 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6891 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6892 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6893
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6894 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6895 of this document, or of portions of it,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6896 under the above conditions, provided also that they
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6897 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6898
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6899 Local variables:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6900 mode: outline
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6901 paragraph-separate: "[ ]*$"
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6902 end: